User Manual for DENON models including: DENON, AVR-X4700H, 9.2 Channel, Dolby, Atmos, Receiver
Connecting a TV. Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) View
DENON AVR-X4700H 9.2-Ch x 125 Watts 8K A/V Receiver w/HEOS | Accessories4less
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
.
Tips
Appendix
AVR-X4700H
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Owner's Manual
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
1
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Accessories
8 Connecting a TV
72
Inserting the batteries Operating range of the remote control unit Features High quality sound High performance
9
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
9 10
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
73
10
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC
13
(Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
74
Easy operation
17
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
75
Part names and functions
18 Connecting a playback device
76
Front panel
18
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
77
Display
22
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
78
Rear panel
24
Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K
79
Remote control unit
28
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
80
Connections
Connecting a turntable
81
Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port
82
Speaker installation
32 Connecting FM/AM antennas
83
Connecting speakers
40 Connecting to a home network (LAN)
85
Before connecting speakers
40
Wired LAN
85
Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings
44
Wireless LAN
86
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers
46 Connecting an external control device
87
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers
47
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
87
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers
51
TRIGGER OUT jacks
88
Connecting 11.1-channel speakers
59 Connecting the power cord
89
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front
speakers
65
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers 66
Connecting multi-zone speakers
67
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
2
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Basic operation Turning the power on Selecting the input source Adjusting the volume Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
Playing a USB memory device Playing files stored on USB memory devices
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device Playing music from Bluetooth device Pairing with other Bluetooth devices Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
105
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
106
91
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
107
91
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
108
91
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
92
Preset Memory)
108
92
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
109
92
Listening to preset stations
109
93
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
110
94
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
111
97
Cancelling Preset Skip
112
98 Listening to Internet Radio
113
100
Listening to Internet Radio
114
101 Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
115
102
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
116
103
104
104
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
3
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Getting the HEOS App
119 Selecting a sound mode
141
HEOS Account
120
Selecting a sound mode
142
Playing from streaming music services
121
Direct playback
143
Listening to the same music in multiple rooms
124
Pure Direct playback
144
AirPlay function
128
Auto surround playback
144
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
129
Description of sound mode types
145
Playing iTunes music with this unit
129
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
150
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple
HDMI Control function
156
synced devices (AirPlay 2)
130
Setting procedure
156
Spotify Connect function
131 Smart Menu function
157
Playing Spotify music with this unit
131 Sleep timer function
159
Convenience functions
132
Using the sleep timer
160
Adding to HEOS Favorites
133 Quick select plus function
161
Playing back HEOS Favorites
133
Calling up the settings
162
Deleting a HEOS Favorites
134
Changing the settings
163
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)
135
Panel lock function
164
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
136
Disabling all key button operations
164
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
164
Select)
137
Canceling the Panel lock function
165
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)
138
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
139
Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment
(Speaker Preset)
140
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
4
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Remote lock function Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit Enabling the remote sensor function
Web control function Controlling the unit from a web control
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) Connecting ZONE Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
Settings
Menu map Menu operations
166 Audio
166
Center Level Adjust
166
Subwoofer Level Adjust
167
Bass Sync
167
Surround Parameter
169
Restorer
169
Audio Delay
175
Volume
Audyssey®
Graphic EQ
177 Video
181
Picture Adjust
HDMI Setup
Output Settings
Component Video Out
On Screen Display
Screen Saver
4K/8K Signal Format
HDCP Setup
TV Format
Inputs
Input Assign
Source Rename
Hide Sources
Source Level
Tips
Appendix
182 182 182 183 183 190 191 192 193 196 198 198 200 205 209 209 210 211 212 213 214 214 217 217 218
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
5
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Speakers Audyssey® Setup
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) Error messages Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings Manual Setup Amp Assign Speaker Config. Distances Levels Crossovers Bass Front Speaker 2ch Playback Speaker Preset Network Information Connection Wi-Fi Setup Settings Network Control Friendly Name Diagnostics AirPlay
219 HEOS Account
258
219
You have not signed in
258
221
You have already signed in
258
227 General
259
229
Language
259
230
ECO
259
230
Bluetooth Transmitter
263
238
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
264
243
Zone Rename
266
244
Quick Select Names
266
245
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
267
246
Front Display
267
247
Firmware
268
247
Information
271
250
Usage Data
273
251
Save & Load
273
251
Setup Lock
274
251
Reset
274
252 Operating external devices with the remote control unit
275
254
Registering preset codes
276
256
Operating devices
279
256
Initializing registered preset codes
282
257
Specifying the operating zone with the remote control
282
257
Resetting the remote control unit
282
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
6
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Tips
Tips
284
Troubleshooting
286
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
287
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 288
Display on this unit shows nothing
288
No sound comes out
289
Desired sound does not come out
290
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
293
No video is shown on the TV
294
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
296
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed
on the television is different from normal
296
AirPlay cannot be played back
297
USB memory devices cannot be played back
298
Bluetooth cannot be played back
299
The Internet radio cannot be played back
301
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
302
Various online services cannot be played
303
The HDMI Control function does not work
303
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
304
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 305
Update/upgrade error messages
306
Resetting factory settings
307
Resetting network settings
308
Appendix
About HDMI Video conversion function Playing back a USB memory devices Playing back a Bluetooth device Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS Playing back Internet Radio Personal memory plus function Last function memory Explanation of terms Trademark information Specifications Index
Appendix
309 313 315 316 317 318 318 318 319 329 332 338
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
7
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Thank you for purchasing this Denon product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product. After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
.
Tips
Appendix
Quick Start Guide
Safety Instructions
Notes on radio
Warranty (for North America
model only)
Cable labels
Power cord
FM indoor antenna
AM loop antenna
Sound calibration microphone
Sound calibration microphone stand
Remote control unit (RC-1240)
R6P/AA batteries
External antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
8
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Inserting the batteries
1 Slide the rear cover off the remote control unit in the arrow direction.
.
2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated. Batteries
Settings
Tips
Appendix
NOTE 0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one. 0 Do not use two different types of batteries. 0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods. 0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
Approx. 23 ft/7 m
30° 30°
.
3 Put the rear cover back on.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
9
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Features
High quality sound
0 Powerful 9-Channel Amplifier with the Latest Home Cinema Specs Featuring discrete high-current amplifiers on all channels, this unit delivers high-power performance at 125 watts per channel (8 ohms, 20Hz-20kHz, THD: 0.05%, 2 ch. driven) to ensure a dynamic and precise entertainment experience. Low impedance drivers provide operational stability for a wide range of speakers and create a balanced, tonal sound. This unit features an advanced HDMI section with HDCP 2.3 support, and video processing with 4K and 8K pass-through and upscaling for HDMI sources. Upgrade your expectations in home theater entertainment.
0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 320) This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.
0 Speaker Virtualizer (v p. 185) Speaker Virtualizer enables you to access a more immersive entertainment experience from traditional channel based speaker layouts through digital signal processing including Dolby Atmos height virtualization and surround virtualization. 0 Speaker Virtualizer is not for use when both height speakers and surround speakers are connected.
0 Height Virtualization may be applied when surround speakers are connected.
0 DTS:X (v p. 323)
This unit is equipped with the DTS:X decoder technology. DTS:X brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. The flexibility of objects allows for sound to be scaled large or small and moved around the room with greater accuracy than ever before leading to a richer immersive audio experience.
0 DTS Virtual:X (v p. 324)
DTS Virtual:X technology features DTS's proprietary virtual height and virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker configuration.
0 DTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.
0 IMAX Enhanced (v p. 324)
This IMAX Enhanced product have met stringent performance standards established by IMAX and DTS in order to create a consistent and higher bar for sound performance. DTS has developed a special method for reproducing an IMAX signature sound experience in the consumer's home. This method combines a unique conversion process for IMAX theatrical audio mixes utilizing an enhanced DTS codec technology. The IMAX theatrical audio format with point source surround speakers closely matches the speaker configuration most consumers have in their homes today. Coupled with DTS audio technology, IMAX Enhanced audio products will ensure the best and most accurate audio reproduction over 5.1 or more speaker channels.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
10
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 195)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
0 Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM (v p. 220)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level and delay for each subwoofer individually. Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM makes the integration seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
11
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Auro-3D
This unit is equipped with an Auro-3D decoder. With Auro-3D, Front Height (FHL + FHR), Surround Height (SHL + SHR) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.
You will be able to fully enjoy Auro-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for Auro-3D. 2 Auro-3D playback
2 Dolby Atmos playback
SHL SL
TS
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
SHR SR
SHL SL
TS
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
SHR SR
. .
0 Auro-3D does not support a Dolby Atmos configuration using Top Front, Top Middle or Top Rear speakers. But it is possible to support both an Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos by adding Front Height and Rear Height speakers* to a 5.1 configuration. z For an optimum Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are strongly recommended.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
12
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
High performance
0 Ultimate Home Theater Experience 8K Ready This unit delivers the ultimate home theater experience with 8K/60Hz pass-through, 4K/120Hz pass-through for gaming, and support for the latest HDMI specifications. This unit allows you to build the best 4K home theater system, and offers the convenience of knowing that the used AV receiver is ready for 8K format whenever the user decides to use it. Enjoy the highest quality 3D audio and video for even the most demanding entertainment needs.
0 HDCP 2.3 This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.3 copyright protection standard.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Digital video processor upscales SD (resolution) or HD (720p/ 1080p) / 4K to 8K
8K
8K
Up to 1080p/4K 60Hz
8K
8K Ultra HD
up scaling
.
This unit is equipped with a 8K video upscaling function that allows SD (Standard Definition) or HD (High Definition)/4K 60Hz video to be output via HDMI at 8K (7680 × 4320 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source.
0 Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 169) The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing in the main room.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
13
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (8 inputs, 3 outputs)
83
In Out
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 128)
.
For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8 HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMIequipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a third HDMI output for another room.
0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility
The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC functioncompatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit. Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.
.
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC. This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0 Supports AirPlay 2® wireless audio Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback. This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
14
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.
0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (v p. 97)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Connect Bluetooth headphones
This unit can transmit Bluetooth so you can enjoy audio wirelessly through your Bluetooth headphones.
Playback can be performed using connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.
.
.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
15
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 139) MAIN ZONE
ZONE2ZONE3
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Compatible with the "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" Appz for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or AndroidTM devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
.
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the background music propagate throughout the whole house.
0 Energy-saving design This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.
.
Along with many new features, the graphics and user interface have been completely overhauled. The new app gives you full control of this unit as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from your phones or tablets. "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App also gives you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus, Denon Bluray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your convenience.
z Download the appropriate "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App for your iOS or Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPad, iPhone or AndroidTM is connected to.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
16
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music sources
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Easy operation
0 "Setup Assistant" provides easy-to-follow setup instructions First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.
0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.
.
HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS, Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play music from your own music library or from many online streaming music services.
When multiple products with HEOS Built-in are connected to the same network, they can be grouped to play the same music on all products simultaneously, or different music can be played on each one.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
17
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Part names and functions
Front panel
Settings
qw
er
t
Tips
Appendix
y
.
For details, see the next page.
Front panel
Display
u
Rear panel
18
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
q w er
t
y
u
.
A Power operation button (X) Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (v p. 91)
B Power indicator This is lit as follows according to the power status: 0 White: Power on 0 Off: Normal standby 0 Red: 0 When "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On" (v p. 200) 0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On" (v p. 202) 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On" (v p. 256)
C SOURCE SELECT knob This selects the input source. (v p. 91)
D Remote control sensor This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
E Display This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 22)
F MASTER VOLUME knob This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 92)
G Door When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
19
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
With the door open
qw e r t y u i o
Playback Q0
.
A ZONE2 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE2 (another room) on/off. (v p. 175)
B ZONE2 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 175)
C ZONE3 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE3 (another room) on/off. (v p. 175)
D ZONE3 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE3. (v p. 175)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
E STATUS button Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.
F Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 272)
G Cursor buttons (uio p) These select items.
H OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
I DIMMER button Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 267)
J QUICK SELECT buttons With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various settings you've registered to each button such as the input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 161)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
20
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Q1
Q2 Q3
Q4 Q5
Q6 Q7
.
K AUX-HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 80)
L USB port (T)
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices). (v p. 82)
M BACK button This returns to the previous screen.
N ENTER button This determines the selection.
O SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 181)
P SETUP MIC jack This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (v p. 222)
Q Headphones jack (PHONES) This is used to connect headphones. When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.
NOTE 0 To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
21
Remote
Index
Contents
Display
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
q
we
r ty
ui o
Appendix
Q0
.
A Input signal indicators These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input source. (v p. 216)
B Decoder indicators These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or DTS decoder is running.
C Audyssey® indicator This lights when "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" or "Audyssey LFCTM" has been set up. (v p. 193)
Q1 Q2
D Tuner reception mode indicators These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "Tuner". TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in. STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
E Monitor output indicator These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to "Auto(Dual)", the indicators light according to connection status.
F MULTI ZONE indicator This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (another room) power is turned on. (v p. 175)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
22
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback ui o
Q0
Q1 Q2
.
G Sleep timer indicator This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 159)
H MUTE indicator This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 92)
I Volume indicator
J Information display The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
K Front speaker indicator This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
L Input/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the setting configured for "Channel Indicators". (v p. 268)
0 When "Channel Indicators" is set to "Output" (Default) These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0 When "Channel Indicators" is set to "Input" These light corresponding to the channels that include the input signals.
When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE channel) is input.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
23
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Rear panel
q w e r ty u
i
o
q Q0
Q1
Q2
.
For details, see the next page.
Q3
Q4
Q5
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
24
Remote
Index
Contents qw e r
Connections
Playback q
.
A Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 86)
A Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
B Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected. C Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.
q
w
e
Settings
Tips
Appendix
B TRIGGER OUT jacks
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (v p. 88)
C Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 74)
0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 75)
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78)
D RS-232C connector
Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner's manual of the home automation controller for more information about serial control of this unit.
Perform the operation below beforehand.
A Turn on the power of this unit. B Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller. C Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
25
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
t yu i
o
Playback qQ0
.
E REMOTE CONTROL jacks Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 87)
F SIGNAL GND terminal Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 81)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
G NETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (v p. 85)
H Video connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 75)
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78)
I HDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
0 "Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 73)
0 "Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 74)
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78) 0 "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (v p. 79)
J AC inlet (AC IN) Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 89)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
26
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Q1
Q2
.
Q3
Q4 Q5
K FM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA) Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 83)
L Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors. 0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78) 0 "Connecting a turntable" (v p. 81)
M Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) Used to connect speakers. (v p. 40)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
N PRE OUT connectors Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier. 0 "Connecting the subwoofer" (v p. 41) 0 "Connecting 11.1-channel speakers" (v p. 59) 0 "Connecting ZONE" (v p. 169)
O Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors. 0 "Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 75) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78)
NOTE 0 Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
27
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Remote control unit
q w e
r
t y
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME
8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PL AYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DEF SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
A AVR operation buttons (AVR CONTROL MAIN, Z2, Z3) These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated through the remote control unit. 0 "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (v p. 175) 0 "Menu operations" (v p. 181) 0 "Specifying the operating zone with the remote control" (v p. 282)
B Operation mode indicators The "AVR" operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being operated. The "DEV." indicator lights when an external device is being operated. The "TV" indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
C Device operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU) These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (v p. 275)
D Input source select buttons These select the input source. 0 "Selecting the input source" (v p. 91) 0 "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (v p. 175)
E QUICK SELECT buttons (1 4) These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 161)
F Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df) These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages. (v p. 109)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
28
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
u i o Q0 Q1
Q2
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
Q3
Settings
Tips
Appendix
G MUTE button (:) This mutes the output audio. 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)" (v p. 92) 0 "Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/ ZONE3)" (v p. 176)
H Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 272)
I Cursor buttons (uio p) These select items.
J BACK button This returns to the previous screen.
K System buttons These perform playback related operations. Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, ) These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 106)
L Number / Character buttons These enter letters or numbers into the unit. 0 "Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 106) 0 "Operating external devices with the remote control unit" (v p. 275)
M Remote control signal transmitter This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
29
Remote
Index
Contents Front panel
Connections
Playback
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
Q4
Q5
Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 W0
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
W1 W2
Q9
Settings
Tips
Appendix
N POWER button (X) This turns the power on/off. 0 "Turning the power on" (v p. 91) 0 "Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3" (v p. 175)
O TV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT) These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (v p. 280)
P ECO Mode button (G) This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 259)
Q VOLUME buttons (df) These adjust the volume level. 0 "Adjusting the volume" (v p. 92) 0 "Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)" (v p. 176)
R OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.
S ENTER button This determines the selection.
T SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 181)
U SOUND MODE buttons These select the sound mode. (v p. 141)
V SLEEP button This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 159)
Display
Rear panel
30
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
o Contents
Speaker installation Connecting speakers Connecting a TV Connecting a playback device Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port Connecting FM/AM antennas Connecting to a home network (LAN) Connecting an external control device Connecting the power cord
Playback
32 40 72 76 82 83 85 87 89
NOTE
0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the "Setup Assistant" is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") screen for making connections. (During "Setup Assistant" operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Cables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.
Speaker cable
.
Subwoofer cable
.
HDMI cable
.
Component video cable
.
Video cable
.
Coaxial digital cable
.
Optical cable
.
Audio cable
L
L
R
R
.
LAN cable
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
31
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.
FL SL
SW1
SBL
.
FR
C
SW2
SR
SB
SBR
Settings
Tips
Appendix
FL/FR (Front speaker left/ right):
Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.
C (Center speaker):
Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.
Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
SL/SR
equal distance to the left and right sides of the
(Surround speaker left/ main listening position. If you don't have
right):
surround back speakers, move the surround
speakers slightly behind your listening position.
SBL/SBR (Surround back speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.
SW 1/2 (Subwoofer):
Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across the front of your room.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
32
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
TRL
TML
RHL
TFL
FHL
TRR TMR TFR
FHR
RHR
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
FHL/FHR (Front height left/right):
speaker
Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR (Top front speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TML/TMR
Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
(Top middle speaker directly above the main listening position and
left/right):
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TRL/TRR (Top rear speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly behind your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
RHL/RHR (Rear height speaker left/right):
Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers directly behind the main listening position. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aligned with the left and right front speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
33
Remote
Index
Contents
SHL SL
Connections
TS
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
Playback
SHR SR
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
SHL/SHR (Surround height speaker left/right):
TS (Top surround speaker):
Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the surround speakers.
Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly above the main listening position and aligned with the center channel speaker.
0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
34
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
FDL SDL
FDR SDR
Settings
Tips
Appendix
About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upwardpointing speaker that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.
BDL
BDR
.
Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
FDL/FDR
on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled
(Front Dolby speaker integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
left/right):
Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front
speaker.
Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled
.
SDL/SDR
speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby
(Surround Dolby
Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround
speaker left/right): speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
instead of the surround speaker.
Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on
BDL/BDR
the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos
(Back Dolby speaker Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back
left/right):
speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker
instead of the surround back speaker.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
35
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.
0 The "Speaker Virtualizer" must be set to "On" for Dolby Atmos playback with 5.1channel speaker configurations or less. (v p. 185)
0 IMAX DTS:X / DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration.
0 Auro-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR HEIGHT, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and Auro-3D playback.
0 Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
Top middle / Top surround speaker Surround height speaker
Top front speaker
Top rear speaker
Front height speaker
Point slightly downwards
z1
z4 z5 z3 z2
Rear height speaker
Point slightly downwards
Surround back speaker
Front speaker
GViewed from the sideH
Surround speaker
z1 30° - 45° z4 125° - 150°
z2 30° - 55° z5 135° - 150°
z3 65° - 100°
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Height speakers layout
FHL
FHR
FL
FR
TFL
C
TFR
TML
TMR
SL
SR
TS
SHL
TRL TRR
SHR
RHL
RHR
GViewed from the topH
.
0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
36
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using surround back speakers
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o When 5.1-channel speakers are installed
FL
FR
SW C z1
z2
SL
z3 SR
Listening
SBL
position
SBR
.
z1 22° - 30° z2 90° - 110° z3 135° - 150°
0 When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.
FL
FR
SW C z1 z2
SL
SR
.
z1 22° - 30° z2 120°
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
37
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Layout including height speakers and ceiling speakers
n Height speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height speakers.
RHL FHL
FL
SL
SW
FHR
FR C
RHR SR
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n Ceiling speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top rear speakers.
TRL TFL
TRR TFR
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
38
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
n Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby speakers.
SDL SL
FDL FL SW
FDR
C
FR
SDR
SR
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n Auro-3D layout example
Combination of 5.1-channel speakers with Front Height/Surround Height/Top Surround speakers.
SHL SL
TS
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
SHR SR
. .
0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
39
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Connecting speakers
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
Before connecting speakers
NOTE
0 Disconnect this unit's power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. ("Protection circuit" (v p. 328))
0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the "Setup Assistant" (page 9 in the separate "Quick Start Guide") is running, follow the instructions in the "Setup Assistant" screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the "Setup Assistant" is running.)
0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 16 /ohms.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
NOTE
0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 6 /ohms.
1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "zVideo Format <NTSC>" appears on the display.
2. Press i on the main unit three times. "zSp. Impedance <8ohms>" appears on the display.
3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the impedance.
8ohms (Default):
Select when the impedance for all of the connected speakers is 8 /ohms or over.
6ohms:
Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 /ohms.
4ohms:
Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 /ohms.
4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
40
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1 Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit. To use two subwoofers, set "Subwoofer" to "2 spkrs" in the "Speaker Config." setting. (v p. 238) The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.
.
2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.
.
3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.
SW1
.
SW2
.
4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.
Front panel
.
Display
Rear panel
41
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable. Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable. This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.
Speaker FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SURROUND L SURROUND R SURROUND BACK L SURROUND BACK R FRONT HEIGHT L FRONT HEIGHT R TOP FRONT L TOP FRONT R TOP MIDDLE L TOP MIDDLE R TOP REAR L TOP REAR R
Color White Red Green Light Blue Blue Beige Brown Light Yellow Yellow Light Yellow Yellow Light Purple Purple Light Purple Purple
Speaker SURROUND HEIGHT L SURROUND HEIGHT R REAR HEIGHT L REAR HEIGHT R FRONT DOLBY L FRONT DOLBY R SURROUND DOLBY L SURROUND DOLBY R BACK DOLBY L BACK DOLBY R TOP SURROUND SUBWOOFER 1 SUBWOOFER 2
Appendix
Color Light Purple
Purple Light Purple
Purple Light Yellow
Yellow Light Purple
Purple Light Purple
Purple Black Black Black
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
42
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown in the diagram. Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable. Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal matches that of the cable label.
G How to attach the cable labels H
Speaker
This unit
Settings
.
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
43
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Speaker configuration and "Amp Assign" settings
This unit has a built-in 9-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing the "Amp Assign" settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (v p. 230)
Perform "Amp Assign" settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 230)
Playback speaker in each zone
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
ZONE3
"Amp Assign" settings
Connection page
5.1-channel playback
Can be set in all "Amp
46
Assign" modes.
7.1-channel playback
7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)
47
9.1-channel playback 11.1-channel playback
9.1ch
51
2-channel (Pre-out) 2-channel (Pre-out)
11.1ch
59
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
7.1ch (Bi-Amp)
65
Second front speakers
7.1ch + Front B
66
7.1-channel playback
2-channel
2-channel (Pre-out) 7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default)
67
(Speaker out)
7.1-channel playback
2-channel (Pre-out)
2-channel
7.1ch + ZONE3
67
(Speaker out)
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
2-channel
2-channel (Pre-out) 5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2
68
(Speaker out)
5.1-channel playback
2-channel
2-channel
5.1ch + ZONE2/3
69
(Speaker out)
(Speaker out)
7.1-channel playback
1-channel
1-channel
7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
70
(Speaker out)
(Speaker out)
9.1-channel playback (using this unit as a pre amplifier)
Not used
Not used
Pre Amplifier
71
The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. The following pages provide basic connection examples.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
44
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Refer to the example connection for "Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system" (v p. 57) when playing Auro-3D with a 9.1channel system using the basic 5.1-channel system and the front height and surround height speakers. Also refer to the connection example for "Example connection for the Auro-3D 10.1-channel system" (v p. 62) when playing Auro-3D with a 10.1-channel system by adding the top surround speaker.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 In addition to the connections described in p.46 - 70, this unit allows for various speaker connections with the "Amp Assign" setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in "View Terminal Config." on the "Amp Assign" setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.
Speakers/Amp Assign
Assign Mode
11.1ch
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
FRONT
FRONT
SUBWOOFER 12
SUBWOOFER
HEIGHT2 T.REAR
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURR.BACK
SURR.BACK
HHEEIGIGHHTT11
HEIGHT1
HEIGHT2
HEIGHT2
FRONT
CENTER
Back
SURROUND
SURR.BACK
T.FRONT
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
45
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers
This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.
FL
FR
SW C
SL
SR
.
Settings
Tips
SW FR FL C SR SL
.
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
46
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers
o Example connections when using surround back speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.
Appendix
FL
FR
SW C
SL
SR
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Floor" to "5ch & SB" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL
.
0 When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
47
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connections when using ceiling speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with ceiling speakers.
Appendix
TML
TMR
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
SW FR FL C SR SL
.
TMR TML
.
0 Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
0 The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
48
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connections when using height speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.
FHL
FHR
FL
FR
Appendix
SW C
SL
.
SR
SW FR FL C SR SL
FHR FHL
.
0 Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
0 The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
49
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connections when using Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby speakers.
Appendix
FDL
FDR
SL
FL SW
C
FR
SR
SW FR FL C SR SL
.
FDR FDL
.
0 Set "Floor" to "5ch" and "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
0 The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
50
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting 9.1-channel speakers
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time. You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
o Example connection when using one set of ceiling speakers
TML
TMR
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL TMR TML
HEIGHT 1z
.
z The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under "Height" "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
51
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers
Appendix
TRL TFL
TRR TFR
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
.
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL
TFR TFL TRR TRL
HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 58)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
52
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
o Example connection when using one set of height speakers
Tips
Appendix
FHL
FHR
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL
HEIGHT 1z
.
z The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
53
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Example connection when using two sets of height speakers
RHL SL
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
RHR SR
.
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL
FHR FHL RHR RHL
HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 58)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
54
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connection when using one set of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Appendix
FDL
FDR
SL
FL SW
C
FR
SR
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "2ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FDR FDL
HEIGHT 1z
.
z The surround Dolby or back Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
55
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
Appendix
FDL
SDL
FL SW
SL
FDR
C
FR
SDR
SR
.
0 Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL
FDR FDL SDR SDL
HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 58)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
56
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
o Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.
Tips
Appendix
SHL SL
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
SHR SR
.
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233) Next, set "Height" - "Layout" to "Front Height & Surr. Height". (v p. 234)
SW FR FL C SR SL
FHR FHL SHR SHL
HEIGHT 1z1 HEIGHT 2z1z2
.
z1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 58)
z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
57
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Channels output from the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker systems being
used. Set this from "Amp Assign" in the menu. (v p. 230)
Combination of height speakers to be used
Connected terminals
Number of height/ Number of Dolby
ceiling speakers
Speakers
Combination pattern
HEIGHT1 SPEAKER HEIGHT2 SPEAKER
Front Height
Front Height
-
Top Front
Top Front
-
2 speakers
None
Top Middle
Top Middle
-
Top Rear
Top Rear
-
Rear Height
Rear Height
-
Front Dolby
Front Dolby
-
None
2 speakers
Surround Dolby
Surround Dolby
-
Back Dolby
Back Dolby
-
Front Height & Top Middle
Front Height
Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear
Front Height
Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height z
Front Height
Rear Height
4 speakers
None
Front Height & Surr. Height
Front Height
Surr. Height
Top Front & Top Rear
Top Front
Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height
Top Front
Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height
Top Middle
Rear Height
Front Dolby & Top Rear
Front Dolby
Top Rear
2 speakers
2 speakers
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Dolby
Front Dolby Front Height
Rear Height Surround Dolby
Top Front & Surr. Dolby
Top Front
Surround Dolby
None
4 speakers
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby
Front Dolby
Surround Dolby
z For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
58
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Connecting 11.1-channel speakers
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 11.1-channels at the same time. You can connect speakers for 11-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier.
o Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers
TRL TFL
TRR TFR
HEIGHT 2z TRR TRL
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
Power amplifier
Appendix
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL TFR TFL
HEIGHT 1z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 63)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
59
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
o Example connection when using two sets of height speakers
RHL FHL
RHR FHR
Tips
HEIGHT 2z RHR RHL
FL
FR
SL
SW
C
SR
Power amplifier
Appendix
SBL
.
SBR
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHL
HEIGHT 1z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 63)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
60
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers
HEIGHT 2z SDR SDL
FDL
SDL
FL SW
SL SBL
.
FDR
C
FR
SDR SR
SBR
Power amplifier
0 Set "Height" - "Dolby Sp" to "4ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233)
Appendix
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FDR FDL
HEIGHT 1z
.
z You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 63)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
61
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Example connection for the Auro-3D 10.1-channel system
This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.
SHL SL
TS
FHL
FHR
FL SW
FR C
SHR SR
TS Power amplifier
Appendix
.
0 Set "Height" - "Height Sp" to "5ch" in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 233) Next, set "Height" - "Layout" to "Front Height & Surr. Height". (v p. 234)
SW FR FL C SR SL
FHR FHL SHR SHL
HEIGHT 1z1 HEIGHT 2z1z2
.
z1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 64)
z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
62
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
The combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker system being used. Set this from "Amp Assign" in the menu. (v p. 230)
Combination of height speakers to be used
Number of height/ ceiling speakers
Number of Dolby Speakers
Combination pattern
Front Height
Top Front
2 speakers
None
Top Middle
Top Rear
Rear Height
Front Height & Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height z
4 speakers
None
Front Height & Surr. Height
Top Front & Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height
Front Dolby
None
2 speakers
Surround Dolby
Back Dolby
Front Dolby & Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height
2 speakers
2 speakers
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height & Back Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby
Top Front & Back Dolby
None
4 speakers
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby & Back Dolby
Connected terminals
HEIGHT1 SPEAKER
HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
Front Height Top Front Top Middle Top Rear Rear Height
Front Height Front Height Front Height Front Height
Top Front Top Front Top Middle Front Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolby Front Dolby Front Dolby Front Height Front Height Top Front Top Front Front Dolby Front Dolby
Top Middle Top Rear Rear Height Surr. Height Top Rear Rear Height Rear Height Top Rear Rear Height Surround Dolby Back Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolby
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
63
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Combination of height speakers to be used
Connected terminals
Number of height/ ceiling speakers
Number of Dolby Speakers
Combination pattern
HEIGHT1 SPEAKER
HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER2 PRE OUT
5 speakers
None
Front Height & Surr. Height & Top Surround
Front Height & Rear Height & Top Surroundz
Front Height Front Height
Surround Height Rear Height
Top Surround Top Surround
z For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
64
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Bi-amp connection of front speakers
This system plays back 7.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
FHL
FHR
FL (Bi-Amp)
FR (Bi-Amp)
SW C
SL
SR
SBL
.
SBR
NOTE
0 When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker's woofer and tweeter terminals.
SW
C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz
(R)
(L)
qw
FR
q w
FL
.
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
65
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
FHL
FHR
FL FL (B) (A)
FR FR (A) (B)
SW C
SL
SBL
.
SR SBR
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz FR FL
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
.
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can
be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
66
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting multi-zone speakers
o 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. (Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3)).
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
MAIN ZONE
FHL
FHR
FL
FR
SW C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
ZONE2
ZONE2 L
ZONE2 R
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz
ZONE2 ZONE2
R
L
.
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can
be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
67
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o 5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in MAIN ZONE.
MAIN ZONE
FL (Bi-Amp)
FR (Bi-Amp)
SW C
SL
SR
ZONE2
ZONE2 L
ZONE2 R
SW
.
C SR SL
(R)
qw
FR
ZONE2 ZONE2
R
L
(L)
q w
FL
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
68
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o 5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
MAIN ZONE
FL
FR
SW C
SL
SR
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE2 L
ZONE2 R
ZONE3 L
ZONE3 R
SW FR FL C SR SL
.
ZONE3 ZONE3
R
L
ZONE2 ZONE2
R
L
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
69
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o 7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
MAIN ZONE
FHL
FHR
FL
FR
SW C SL SBL ZONE2
SR
SBR ZONE3
SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL FHRz FHLz
ZONE3 ZONE2 Mono Mono
.
z The height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from "Height" - "Layout" in the menu. (v p. 234)
ZONE2 Mono
ZONE3 Mono
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
70
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Connecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.
Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
Subwoofer (Primary)
Power amplifier
Subwoofer (Secondary)
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
1
FRONT CENTER LR
AUDIO
HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1
LR
LR
SURROUND SURROUND BACK
LR
LR
AUDIO
SUBWOOFER
2
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
0 Set "Assign Mode" to "Pre Amplifier" if connecting all channels to the Pre-out connectors using an external amplifier. (v p. 232) This stops operation of the internal power amplifier of this unit, reducing interference in the pre amplifier created by the power amplifier.
0 When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
71
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit. How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV. ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector? Yes
Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?
Yes
No
No
.
"Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 73)
"Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)" (v p. 74)
"Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector" (v p. 75)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
72
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC / eARC function to this unit. Set "HDMI Control" to "On" or "ARC" to "On" when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 202) Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "HDMI Control" and "ARC" settings in the menu.
TV
HDMI IN
(ARC / eARC)
0 When using the ARC / eARC function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual.
0 When an ARC and eARC function-compatible television is connected, the eARC function is prioritized.
0 Use a "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" when using an ARC / eARC function-compatible television.
0 Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K video.
0 Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (v p. 211)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
73
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
TV
OUT
OPTICAL OUT
IN
HDMI IN
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
74
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
OUT
OPTICAL OUT
TV
VIDEO IN
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR
Tips
or
Appendix
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
75
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio). Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect. If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections. In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0 "Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)" (v p. 77) 0 "Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player" (v p. 78)
0 "Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K" (v p. 79) 0 "Connecting a video camcorder or game console" (v p. 80) 0 "Connecting a turntable" (v p. 81)
0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See "Input Assign" on how to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 214)
0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" to "TV". (v p. 200)
0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
76
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
(HDMI incompatible device)
Satellite tuner /
Cable TV
AUDIO
VIDEO
COAXIAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
RL
VIDEO OUT
Satellite tuner / Cable TV
HDMI OUT
RL
or
RL
Appendix
Front panel
.
Display
Rear panel
77
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
(HDMI incompatible device) Blu-ray Disc player
VIDEO
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO OUT
RL
(HDMI incompatible device)
DVD player
AUDIO
COAXIAL OUT
AUDIO OUT
RL
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR
Blu-ray Disc player
HDMI OUT
DVD player
HDMI OUT
RL RL
RL
or
RL
Appendix
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
78
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K
This unit supports 8K HDMI video signals. If your player supports 8K, connect it to the HDMI 7 (8K) connector on your device.
8K player
HDMI OUT
Tips
Appendix
0 To enjoy 8K video, connect an 8K-compatible TV with an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
0 Set "4K/8K Signal Format" to "8K Enhanced" in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (v p. 211)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
79
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Connecting a video camcorder or game console
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example. Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
Tips
Appendix
Video camcorder
HDMI OUT
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
80
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer. If you set this unit's input source to "Phono" and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.
Turntable (MM cartridge)
AUDIO OUT
LR
GND
NOTE
0 The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
81
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port
For operating instructions see "Playing a USB memory device" (v p. 93).
USB memory device
Appendix
.
0 Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that device's supplied AC adapter.
NOTE 0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. 0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit's USB port to a PC via a USB cable. 0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
82
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Connecting FM/AM antennas
Connect the antenna, tune in to a broadcast and then move the antenna to the location where there is least noise. Then use tape, etc. to fix the antenna in this location. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 105))
0 If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
NOTE 0 Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
Settings
Tips
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Appendix
FM indoor antenna (supplied)
Black White
.
qw
e
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
83
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
o Using the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
Playback
Nail, tack, etc.
.
Standing alone Use the procedure shown above to assemble. When assembling, refer to "AM loop antenna assembly".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o AM loop antenna assembly
1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.
Loop antenna
Stand Square hole
Projecting part
.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
84
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN. You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below. 0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s) 0 Playback of streaming music services 0 Using the Apple AirPlay function 0 Operation on this unit via the network 0 Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system 0 Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.
Wired LAN
To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.
PC Modem
NAS (Network Attached
Storage)
Internet
Router
To WAN side
To LAN port To LAN port
LAN port / Ethernet connector
LAN port / Ethernet connector
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
85
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Wireless LAN
When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright. See "Wi-Fi Setup" on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (v p. 252)
Internet
Modem
To WAN side
Router with access point
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:
0 Built-in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0 Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0 The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.
0 When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in "Network". (v p. 251)
NOTE
0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a computer shop for details.
0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet connector on your computer.
0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
86
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately).
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms).
Infrared retransmitter
Infrared sensor
AUX Input
OUT
Output
Device fitted with REMOTE CONTROL IN connectors
Front panel
.
Display
Rear panel
87
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
TRIGGER OUT jacks
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected device's power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC/150 mA electrical signal.
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device
.
NOTE 0 Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jacks. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable. 0 If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the
power to the unit, and disconnect it.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
88
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.
Tips
Appendix
Power cord (supplied) To household power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
89
Remote
Index
Contents
o Contents
Connections
Basic operation
Turning the power on Selecting the input source Adjusting the volume Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) Selecting a sound mode
Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player Playing a USB memory device Listening to music on a Bluetooth device Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playback network audio/service
Listening to Internet Radio
113
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
115
91 Getting the HEOS App
119
91 AirPlay function
128
92 Spotify Connect function
131
92
141 Convenience functions
Convenience functions
132
HDMI Control function
156
92 Smart Menu function
157
93 Sleep timer function
159
97 Quick select plus function
161
102 Panel lock function
164
105 Remote lock function
166
Other functions
Web control function
167
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)
169
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
90
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Basic operation
Playback
Input source select buttons
MUTE :
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME 8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PL AYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
POWER X VOLUME df
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DEF SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Turning the power on
1 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.
0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1 Press the input source select button to be played back. The desired input source can be selected directly.
0 You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main unit.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
91
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Adjusting the volume
1 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting. 0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main
unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
1 Press MUTE :. 0 MUTE indicator on the display flashes. 0 : appears on the TV screen.
0 The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 192) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again. 0 If : is displayed on the TV screen for more than 5 minutes when the "Screen
Saver" is set to "On", the : symbol moves randomly over the TV screen. (v p. 210) (This feature will be supported via firmware update.)
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player.
1 Prepare for playback.
A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player. B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.
2 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit. 3 Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
o Surround playback (v p. 141)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
92
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Playing a USB memory device
CH/PAGE df
uio p ENTER
BACK
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PLAYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
USB
OPTION
1 8 9 3 2
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device. 0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit. 0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT32" or "NTFS"
format. 0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows. See "Playing back a USB memory devices" (v p. 315) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
93
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Playing files stored on USB memory devices
1 Insert a "FAT32" or "NTFS" formatted USB memory device into the USB port.
2 Press USB to switch the input source to "USB". 3 Select the name of this unit.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
4 Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play.
0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.
Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:
Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.
Adds the item to the end of the queue.
USB Music - Nature
Naure 01
Play Now Nature 01 Various Artists
Play Now & Replace Queue
Nature 02 Play Next Various Artists
Nature 03 Add to End of QuVeuaerious Artists
Cancel Nature 04 Various Artists
Nature 05 Various Artists
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
94
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
5 Use ui to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER. Playback starts.
NOW PLAYING
Nature
Nature 01 - Various Artists
2:45
-2:21
.
Settings
Operation buttons 1 3 2 8 9 CH/PAGE d f
Tips
Appendix
Function Playback Pause Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display
0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.
NOTE 0 Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with
the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device. 0 When a USB memory device is connected to this unit, the unit loads all of the files on the USB memory device. Loading may take a while if the USB memory device contains a large number of folders and/or files.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
95
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 136)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 137)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
96
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
POWER X
Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
Bluetooth
NOTE
0 To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support the A2DP profile.
BACK
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
OPTION
1 8 9 3 2
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
97
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing music from Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit. Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.
1 Prepare for playback.
A Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (v p. 25)
B Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2 Press Bluetooth. When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and "Pairing..." will appear on the display of the unit.
3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.
4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device. Connect to the Bluetooth device while "Pairing" is being displayed on the display of the unit. Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 3.3 ft/1 m).
5 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. 0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote control of this unit. 0 The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
98
Remote
Index
Contents
Operation buttons 1 3 2 8 9
Connections
Playback
Function Playback Pause Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
99
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device. 2 Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for
at least 3 seconds. This unit will go into the pairing mode.
3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.
0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.
0 You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting "Pairing Mode" from the displayed option menu.
NOTE
0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices. 0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Pairing with other Bluetooth devices" (v p. 100) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 136) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 137) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
100
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device
After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit. This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.
1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.
2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.
3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.
4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.
0 The screen automatically switches to the "Bluetooth" playback screen if a Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.
0 When the "Network Control" setting of this unit is set to "Always On" and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 256)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
101
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones
You can listen to audio playing through the MAIN ZONE of this unit on Bluetooth headphones. Output audio from connected speakers and Bluetooth headphones simultaneously, or only using Bluetooth headphones.
Appendix
(Output Mode: Bluetooth + Speakers)
.
(Output Mode: Bluetooth Only)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
102
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Listening to audio on Bluetooth headphones
1 Set "Transmitter" to "On" from the "General" "Bluetooth Transmitter" setting in the menu. (v p. 263)
2 Select "Output Mode", and set audio output method.
Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):
Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
This simultaneous output is suitable for family movie night and other group activities.
Bluetooth Only:
Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.
This is suitable for listening to music or watching movies by yourself at night when you need to keep quiet.
3 Enter pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect to this unit.
4 Select "Device List" and select the name of the Bluetooth headphones from the device list.
5 Adjust the volume of connected Bluetooth headphones after the connection is completed.
0 "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu. 0 A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same
steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.
NOTE
0 Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Adjust volume of your Bluetooth headphones.
0 Stereo mode is fixed as the sound mode when using Bluetooth headphones. Any sound modes and other audio settings are not reflected in audio output on Bluetooth headphones. Audio settings, sound modes and All Zone Stereo mode are not available while using Bluetooth headphones and "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth Only".
0 Audio may be delayed when sent over Bluetooth. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when use a Bluetooth input source in
any zone. Furthermore, selecting a Bluetooth input source in any zone will terminate the connection between this unit and Bluetooth headphones. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected when this unit is grouped in the HEOS App.
CAUTION: Using Bluetooth headphones without a volume adjustment function 0 In order to avoid hearing loss, do not connect Bluetooth headphones
that lack volume adjustment functionality. 0 Bluetooth headphone volume may be unexpectedly loud when this
unit connects to Bluetooth headphones. 0 Bluetooth headphone volume cannot be adjusted from this unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
103
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Reconnecting to a Bluetooth headphones
Follow any of the steps below to reconnect the most recently used Bluetooth headphones: 0 Reconnect to this unit with Bluetooth headphone's reconnect function. 0 Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Reconnect" within the
options menu. 0 If "Output Mode" is set to "Bluetooth + Speakers", this unit will
automatically connect to the most recently used Bluetooth headphones when power is turned on. 0 Select the device you wish to connect from the "Device List" under "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the menu.
Disconnecting Bluetooth headphones
Complete any of the following steps to disconnect your Bluetooth headphones: 0 Turn off your Bluetooth headphones. 0 Go to "Bluetooth Transmitter" and then select "Disconnect" within the
options menu. 0 In the setup menu, go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set
"Transmitter" to Off. (v p. 263)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
104
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
CH/PAGE df
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PLAYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
uio p ENTER
BACK
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
TUNER
OPTION TUNE +,
0 9
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Settings
Tips
Appendix
You can use the built-in tuner of this unit to listen to FM broadcasts and AM broadcasts. Make sure the FM antenna and AM loop antenna are connected to this unit first.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
105
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Listening to FM/AM broadcasts
1 Connect the antenna. ("Connecting FM/AM antennas" (v p. 83))
2 Press TUNER to switch the input source to "Tuner".
G TV screen H
Tuner CH 1
FM 92.10MHz
STEREO AUTO
Now Playing
Tune
Preset
OPTION Option
.
G Display of this unit H
01 FM 92.10MHz
.
3 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
4 Use ui to select "FM/AM", then press ENTER. This displays the reception band input screen.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
5 Use o p to select "FM" or "AM", then press ENTER.
FM:
When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM:
When listening to an AM broadcast.
6 Press TUNE + or TUNE to select the station you want listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
0 The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of "Auto" mode that automatically searches available broadcast stations and "Manual" mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is "Auto". You can also use "Direct Tune" to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In "Auto" mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good. If this is the case, then use the "Manual" mode or "Direct Tune" mode to tune in.
Operation buttons TUNE +, CH/PAGE d f u i o p
0 9
Function Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations Selects the radio station (up/down) Selects preset radio stations Preset channel selection / Direct frequency tuning
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
106
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)" (v p. 107) 0 "Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)" (v p. 108)
0 "Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)" (v p. 108)
0 "Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)" (v p. 109)
0 "Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)" (v p. 110)
0 "Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)" (v p. 111)
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 136)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 137)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Direct Tune", then press ENTER. The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3 Use ui or 0 9 to select a number and press p. 0 If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4 Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio station you want to hear.
5 When setting is completed, press ENTER. The preset frequency is tuned in.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
107
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you cannot tune in automatically with "Auto" mode, change the mode to "Manual" and tune in manually.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Tune Mode", then press ENTER. 3 Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.
Auto: Manual:
Automatically search for and tune to a receivable radio station.
Manually change the frequency one step at a time each time the button is pressed.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Auto Preset Memory", then press ENTER.
3 Press ENTER. The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset them. 0 When presetting is completed, "Completed" is displayed for about 5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
0 The preset memory is overwritten.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
108
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. ("Listening to FM/AM broadcasts" (v p. 106))
2 Press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select "Preset Memory", then press ENTER. The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4 Use ui or 0 9 to select the channel you want to preset, then press ENTER. The current broadcast station that is preset. 0 To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Channel 1 8 9 16
17 24 25 32 33 40 41 48 49 56
Default settings
92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10 MHz
94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70 MHz
98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 / 100.30 MHz
100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 / 101.70 / 101.90 MHz
103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 / 104.30 / 104.50 MHz
104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 / 105.90 / 106.10 MHz
106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 / 107.50 / 107.90 MHz
Listening to preset stations
1 Use CH/PAGE df or 0 9 to select the desired preset channel.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
109
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it. Up to 8 characters can be input.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Preset Name", then press ENTER. The "Preset Name" screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station you want to name.
4 Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to name, then press ENTER.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
5 Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER. The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed. 0 If you select "Set Defaults", then the unit returns to displaying the frequency.
6 Enter the characters, then press "OK". 7 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
110
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier by skipping unnecessary memories.
1 Press OPTION when the input source is "Tuner". The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Preset Skip", then press ENTER. The "Preset Skip" screen is displayed.
3 n To set the stations you want to skip by groups A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip. B Press u to select "Set No.z z to Skip", then press ENTER. Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the selected group "z-z". (z is the selected group number.)
n To set the stations you want to skip by stations
A Use o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to skip.
B Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip. C Use o p to select "Skip".
The station you selected is not displayed.
4 Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
111
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Cancelling Preset Skip
1 While the "Preset Skip" screen is displayed, use o p to select a group containing a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
2 Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip for.
3 Use o p to select "On". The skip is cancelled.
NOTE 0 "Preset Skip" cannot be cancelled for groups.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
112
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Listening to Internet Radio
CH/PAGE df
uiop ENTER
BACK
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
(HEOS Music) INTERNET RADIO
OPTION
1 8 9 3 2
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0 The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided by TuneIn Radio service.
0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. See "Playing back Internet Radio" (v p. 318) for details.
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 MPEG-4 AAC
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
113
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Listening to Internet Radio
1 Press INTERNET RADIO. 0 You can also press R (HEOS Music). Use ui to select "TuneIn Internet Radio", then press ENTER.
2 Select the station you want to play.
Operation buttons 1
Playback
Function
3 z
Pause
2
Stop
8 9 z
Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
CH/PAGE d f
Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display
z Enabled when playing Podcasts.
0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
NOTE 0 The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adding to HEOS Favorites" (v p. 133) 0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135) 0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 136) 0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 137) 0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
114
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
CH/PAGE df
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH / PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
(HEOS Music)
0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.
0 Supported file formats: For details, see "Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS" (v p. 317).
0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD
uio p ENTER
BACK
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
D E F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
OPTION
1 8 9 3 2
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
115
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS
Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files servers on your local network.
1 Press R (HEOS Music). 2 Use ui to select "Music Servers", then press ENTER.
MUSIC
TuneIn Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music
.
3 Select the name of your networked PC or NAS (Network Attached Storage) server.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
4 Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play.
0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.
Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:
Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.
Adds the item to the end of the queue.
Music Servers - Live
Live 01
Play Now Live 01 Various Artists
Play Now & Replace Queue
Live 02 Play Next Various Artists
Live 03 Add to End of QuVeuaerious Artists
Cancel Live 04 Various Artists Live 05 Various Artists
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
116
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
5 Use ui to select the "Play Now" or "Play Now & Replace Queue", then press ENTER. Playback starts.
NOW PLAYING Live
Live 01 - Various Artists
2:45
-2:21
.
Operation buttons 1 3 2 8 9
CH/PAGE d f
Function Playback Pause Stop Skip to previous track / Skip to next track Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main unit's STATUS is pressed.
0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.
NOTE
0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
117
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Operations accessible through the option menu
0 "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135)
0 "Adjusting the tone (Tone)" (v p. 136)
0 "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)" (v p. 137)
0 "Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)" (v p. 139)
0 "Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)" (v p. 140)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
118
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Getting the HEOS App
You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from. For more information about which services are available in your area please visit http://www.HEOSbyDenon.com Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for "HEOS".
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
119
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
HEOS Account
HEOS Accounts can be registered in "HEOS Account" (v p. 258) in the menu of this unit or by tapping "Music" tab - "Settings" icon a in the HEOS App.
o What is a HEOS Account?
A HEOS Account is master account or "keychain" for managing all of your HEOS music services with one single username and password.
o Why do I need a HEOS Account?
With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices. You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have access to all of your associated music services, play history and custom playlists, even if you are at a friend's house listening to music on their HEOS system.
o Signing up for a HEOS Account
You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you try to access any music service from the main "Music" menu of the HEOS App.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Changing your HEOS Account
1 Tap the "Music" tab. 2 Select the Settings icon a in the upper left corner of
the screen.
3 Select "HEOS Account". 4 Change your location, change your password, delete
your account or sign out of your account.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
120
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Playing from streaming music services
A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from. For more information about which services are available in your area please visit http://www.HEOSbyDenon.com
NOTE 0 The HEOS App and brand is not affiliated with any manufacturer of any mobile
device. Availability of music services may vary by region. Not all services may be available at time of purchase. Some services may be added or discontinued from time to time based on decisions of the music service providers or others.
o Selecting a room/device
1 Tap the "Rooms" tab, and select "Denon AVR-X4700H" if there are multiple products with HEOS Built-in.
0 Tap the Pencil icon e at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the displayed name.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining L + Dining R Song Name 1
Kitchen Song Name 2
Denon AVR-X4700H Song Name 3
Rooms
.
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
121
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Selecting the music track or station from music sources
1 Tap the "Music" tab and select a music source.
0 All music services displayed may not be available in your location.
Settings
Tips
Music
Appendix
This Phone
Music Servers USB Music
Playlists
History
Rooms
.
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
122
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
2 Browse the music to play. After selecting a music track or radio station the app will automatically change to the "Now Playing" screen.
0 When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.
Play Now:
Play Now & Replace Queue:
Play Next:
Add to End of Queue:
Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.
Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.
Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.
Adds the item to the end of the queue.
0 When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.
Play Now:
Plays the selected item immediately.
Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Album
Artist Album 10 Tracks,60 Mins.,2014
Track 01 Rooms
Play Now Play Now & Replace Queue
Play Next
Add to End of Queue
Rooms
.
Cancel
Music
Now Playing
Now Playing
0:50
Track 01 Artist Album
-2:51
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
123
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Listening to the same music in multiple rooms
This system is a true multi-room audio system. You can create one or
more HEOS groups to automatically synchronize audio playback between
multiple products with HEOS Built-in so that the music playing different rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds amazing! You can easily
1
add up to 32 products to your system in total. You can group up to 16
individual products to have them play the same song fully synchronized.
o Grouping rooms
1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music. .
2 Drag it into the room that is playing music (indicated by the red outline) and lift your finger.
3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Living Kitchen Song Name 2
2
Bedroom Song Name 3
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1
Living+Kitchen Song Name 2
Living
Kitchen Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Bedroom Song Name 3
3
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
124
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Ungrouping rooms
1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.
2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.
NOTE 0 You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.
Settings
Tips
1
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Living
Kitchen Bedroom Song Name 3
2
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
.
Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 4
Bedroom Song Name 3
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
125
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Grouping all rooms (party mode)
You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.
1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms. 2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release. 3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin
playing the same music in perfect sync.
Settings
Tips
2
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 3
Bedroom Song Name 4
Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining+Living+... Song Name 1
Dining
Living Kitchen Bedroom Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
3
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
.
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
126
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Ungrouping all rooms
You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.
1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.
2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.
3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.
Settings
Tips
2
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them
Dining Song Name 1
1
Dining Living
Kitchen Bedroom
Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it
Appendix
Rooms
Drag one room into another to group them Dining Song Name 1
Living Song Name 2
Kitchen Song Name 3
Bedroom Song Name 4
3
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
.
Rooms
Music
Now Playing
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
127
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.
Settings
PC
0 Source input will be switched to "HEOS Music" when AirPlay playback is started. 0 You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source. 0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit. 0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes. 0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
This unit supports AirPlay 2.
Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous
.
playback.
0 This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.
Tips
Router
Appendix
This unit
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
128
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
If you update your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can stream music stored in your "iPhone/iPod touch/iPad" directly to this unit.
1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit. 0 For details, see your device's manual.
2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit.
[Example] iOS 12
[Example] iOS 10
Playing iTunes music with this unit
1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2 Turn this unit ON. Set "Network Control" to "Always On" for this unit. (v p. 256)
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more
standby power.
3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select this unit. [Example] iTunes
Drop: ryone
AirPlay
.
.
4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes. The music will stream to this unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
129
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
NOTE 0 In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod
touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)
Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous playback.
1 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
.
2 Tap the AirPlay icon. Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the same network. 0 A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.
iPhone Denon xxxxxxxx Speakers
.
3 Tap the devices/speakers you want to use. 0 Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected. 0 Volume can be adjusted for each device individually or for all synced devices simultaneously.
iPhone Denon xxxxxxxx Speakers
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
130
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Spotify Connect function
Spotify is all the music you'll ever need. Millions of songs available instantly. Just search for the music you love, or let Spotify play you something great. Spotify works on your phone, tablet, computer and home speakers. So you'll always have the perfect soundtrack for whatever you're doing. Now you can enjoy Spotify with your free account as well as Premium account. Use your phone, tablet or computer as a remote control for Spotify. Go to www.spotify.com/connect to learn how.
Spotify server
Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the "Spotify App" onto your Android or iOS device beforehand. To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify premium account first.
1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.
2 Launch the Spotify App. 3 Play back the Spotify track. 4 Tap the Spotify icon F to select the unit.
The music will stream to this unit.
This unit
Spotify App
Audio streaming /
control
Control
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
131
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Convenience functions
Playback
uio p ENTER
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
(HEOS Music) OPTION
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Settings
Tips
Appendix
This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source.
These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
132
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Adding to HEOS Favorites
1 While content is playing, press OPTION. The option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Add to HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.
Playing back HEOS Favorites
1 Press R (HEOS Music). 2 Use ui to select "HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.
MUSIC
TuneIn Internet Radio HEOS Favorites Music Servers USB Music
.
3 Browse the content and select something to play.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
133
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Deleting a HEOS Favorites
1 While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use ui to select the item you want to remove from HEOS Favorites, then press OPTION.
2 Use ui to select "Remove from HEOS Favorites", then press ENTER.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
134
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "Channel Level Adjust", then press ENTER. The "Channel Level Adjust" screen is displayed.
3 Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
4 Use o p to adjust the volume.
12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
5 Use uio p to select "Exit", then press ENTER.
0 Select "Reset" and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to "0.0 dB" (Default).
0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected. 0 "Channel Level Adjust" settings are stored for each input source. 0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (v p. 200)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
135
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "Tone", then press ENTER. The "Tone" screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On:
Off (Default):
Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble). Playback without tone adjustment.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
4 Select "On" in step 3 and press i to select the sound range to be adjusted.
Bass: Treble:
Adjust bass. Adjust treble.
5 Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
-6 dB +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)
0 "Tone" settings are stored for each input source.
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 This item cannot be set when "Dynamic EQ" is set to "On". (v p. 194)
0 You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV". (v p. 200)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
136
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)
This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source.
n Supported input sources: CDz / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono
z This cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video connectors are assigned.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "Video Select", then press ENTER. The "Video Select" screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off (Default):
On:
Disable Video Select mode. Enable Video Select mode.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
4 If you selected "On" in step 3, press i and select "Source".
5 Use o p to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.
0 "Video Select" settings are stored for each input source.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
137
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)
n Supported input sources : CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX / Media Player / CDz / TV Audioz
z You can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video connector is assigned and "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 206)
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed.
2 Use ui to select "Picture Mode", then press ENTER. The "Picture Mode" screen is displayed.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
3 Use o p to select the picture mode.
Off (Default): Standard: Movie: Vivid: Streaming: ISF Day: ISF Night: Custom:
No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Adjusts the picture quality manually.
4 Press ENTER.
0 "Picture Mode" settings are stored for each input source.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
138
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms). It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same background music in the entire house.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER. The "All Zone Stereo" screen is displayed.
3 Select "Start", then press ENTER. 0 The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode. 0 When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then press "Start".
o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "All Zone Stereo", then press ENTER. 3 Select "Stop", then press ENTER.
0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.
0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the "Multi Ch Stereo" and "Stereo" sound modes can be selected.
0 When "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (v p. 200)
0 Save the All Zone Stereo mode playback status to the Quick Select Plus function to enable simple playback in All Zone Stereo mode with a single touch.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
139
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Changing the speaker settings to match the listening environment (Speaker Preset)
Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.
1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is "HEOS Music", an option menu for online music is displayed. Select "AVR Options...", then press ENTER.
2 Use ui to select "Speaker Preset", then press ENTER. The "Speaker Preset" screen is displayed.
3 Use o p to set the preset.
Preset 1 (Default):
Preset 2:
Use Preset 1. Use Preset 2.
0 This function can be used in the following cases.
0 Adjust the speaker settings manually after setting "Speaker Preset" to "Preset 2".
0 Save the result to "Preset 2" after performing Audyssey® Setup for a second time.
Settings
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
140
Remote
Tips
Appendix
Index
Contents
Connections
Selecting a sound mode
Playback
ui
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH / PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE MUSIC
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
D E F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
PURE GAME
Settings
Tips
Appendix
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes. Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services. This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
0 For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
141
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Selecting a sound mode
1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE : MUSIC : GAME :
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.
0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.
0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
o Switching the sound mode
0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.
0 While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound mode.
0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode.
0 Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/ Surround.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
142
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo Dolby Audio - Dolby Surround
DTS Neural:X Auro-3D
Auro-2D Surround Multi Ch Stereo
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1 Press PURE to select "Direct". Direct playback begins.
0 While DSD signals are played back, "DSD Direct" is displayed.
.
This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of modes that match your speaker configuration and "original sound modes" that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
143
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode. This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1 Press PURE to select "Pure Direct". The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback. Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.
1 Press PURE to select "Auto". Auto surround playback begins.
0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0 Tone (v p. 136) 0 Restorer (v p. 190) 0 MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 193) 0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 194) 0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 195) 0 Graphic EQ (v p. 196)
NOTE
0 Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct mode.
0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5 seconds.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
144
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Description of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode Sound mode type
Dolby Atmos
Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Surround
Description
Please select this mode to play content encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and/or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. An immersive audio experience can be enjoyed from traditional speaker layouts that do not employ overhead or Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers by selecting the Speaker Virtualizer feature.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus.
Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital.
This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
145
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
DTS sound mode Sound mode type
DTS Surround DTS ES Dscrt6.1z1
DTS ES Mtrx6.1z1
DTS 96/24 DTS-HD DTS Express DTS:X
Description
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel. Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this unit's matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right, surround back).
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X. It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
146
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Sound mode type
Description
IMAX DTS
This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS bitstream. (v p. 186)
0 Also this mode is selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "On" in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input.
0 When "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Config." - "Center" is set to "Large" or "Small", and sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS", surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker.
0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the "Front" and "Center" are set to "Small".
IMAX DTS:X
This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS:X bitstream. (v p. 186)
0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the "Front" and "Center" are set to "Small".
DTS Neural:X
This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback. Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
DTS Virtual:Xz2z3
This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field when the height speakers are not used.
z1 This can be selected when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is not set to "None". (v p. 239) z2 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z3 This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
147
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Auro-3D sound mode Sound mode type
Auro-3D
Auro-2D Surround
Description
This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.
This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the AuroMatic is used to output Surround Sound.
PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type
Description
Multi Ch In
This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.
Original sound mode Sound mode type
Multi Ch Stereo Rock Arena Jazz Club Mono Movie
Video Game Matrix Virtual
Description This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers. This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena. This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club. This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs. This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games. This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources. This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R) speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
148
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Auto sound mode Sound mode type
Auto
Stereo sound mode Sound mode type
Stereo
Direct sound mode Sound mode type
Direct Pure Direct
Description In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode. If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.
Description This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing. 0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected. 0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Description This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source. This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the "Direct" mode. The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality. 0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.) 0 The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
149
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons. 0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu "Surround Parameter" to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 183)
Input signal 2-channel z1
Sound mode Stereo Dolby Surround DTS Neural:X z2 DTS Virtual:X z3z4 Auro-3D z5 Auro-2D Surround z6 Multi Ch Stereo Mono Movie Rock Arena Jazz Club Matrix Video Game Virtual
.
MOVIE button S S S S S S S S
S
MUSIC button S S S S S S S
S S S
S
GAME button S S S S S S S
S S
z1 2-channel also includes analog input. z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1 or 11.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is
front speakers only. z3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z4 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z5 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used. z6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
150
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Input signal Multi-channel z7
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos
.
Sound mode Stereo Dolby Digital Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround z8 Dolby Digital + Neural:X z8 Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z8z9 Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X z8 Dolby Atmos z8z10 Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z8z9 Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X z8 Dolby Atmos z8z10 Dolby Atmos
MOVIE button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MUSIC button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z9 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos. z10 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Appendix
GAME button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
151
Remote
Index
Multi-channel z7
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
.
Input signal
Sound mode
MOVIE button
MUSIC button
GAME button
DTS Surround
S
S
S
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 z8
S
S
S
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 z8
S
S
S
DTS 96/24
S
S
S
DTS
DTS + Dolby Surround z8 DTS + Neural:X z8
S
S
S
S
S
S
DTS + Virtual:X z3
S
S
S
IMAX DTS z11
S
S
S
IMAX DTS + Neural:X z8z11
S
S
S
IMAX DTS + Virtual:X z3z11
S
S
S
DTS-HD HI RES
S
S
S
DTS-HD MSTR
S
S
S
DTS-HD / DTS Express
DTS Express DTS-HD + Dolby Surround z8
S
S
S
S
S
S
DTS-HD + Neural:X z8
S
S
S
DTS-HD + Virtual:X z3
S
S
S
z3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z11 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "On" in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input. (v p. 186)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
152
Remote
Index
Multi-channel z7
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Input signal DTS:X IMAX DTS IMAX DTS:X
PCM multi-channel
Sound mode DTS:X DTS:X MSTR DTS:X + Virtual:X z3 IMAX DTS z8z12 IMAX DTS + Neural:X z8z12 IMAX DTS + Virtual:X z3z12 IMAX DTS:X z8z12 IMAX DTS:X + Virtual:X z3z12 Multi Ch In Multi Ch In 7.1 z8 Multi In + Dolby Surround z8 Multi In + Neural:X z8 Multi In + Virtual:X z3
.
MOVIE button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MUSIC button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
GAME button S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z3 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z8 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z12 Selectable when "Surround Parameter" - "IMAX" is set to "Auto" in the menu. When "IMAX" is set to "Off", playback is normal DTS or DTS:X. (v p. 186)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
153
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Input signal Multi-channel z7
Sound mode Auro-3D z5 Auro-2D Surround z6 Multi Ch Stereo Mono Movie Rock Arena Jazz Club Matrix Video Game Virtual
.
MOVIE button S S S S
S
MUSIC button S S S
S S S
S
GAME button S S S
S S
z5 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used. z6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used. z7 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
154
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
o Views on the display
Playback
Settings
qw
.
A Shows a decoder to be used. 0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, "
" is displayed.
B Shows a decoder that creates sound output.
0"
" indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
155
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
HDMI Control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure
1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit. Set "HDMI Control" to "On". (v p. 202)
2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.
3 Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable. 0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices to check the settings. 0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.
5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.
6 When you turn the TV's power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE 0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner's manual of each device for details beforehand. 0 The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. 0 When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with "HDMI Control" in the menu set to
"On", the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
156
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Smart Menu function
This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.
1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit and the TV. (v p. 202)
2 Set "Smart Menu" to "On" on this unit. (v p. 204) 3 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"z or
"Operate Connected HDMI Device"z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. 0 This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the
Smart Menu is displayed. z The selection method differs depending on your TV.
Smart Menu
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Now Playing
Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.
o Source
Switch the input of this unit. If you select "HEOS Music" or "Tuner", you can continue to operate this unit using the TV remote control.
o Sound Mode
Change the sound mode of this unit. You can select from the following three sound modes.
Surround:
Stereo: Multi Ch Stereo:
Surround sound playback according to the input signal.
Stereo playback.
Multi-channel stereo playback.
Now Playing Blu-ray
Source
Sound Mode SSmetaurpt Menu
Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 Quick Select 4 Help
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
157
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Setup Menu
Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.
o Quick Select
Calls up the "Quick Select" items registered to this unit.
NOTE
0 If the "HDMI Control" or "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.
0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off". (v p. 204)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
158
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Sleep timer function
Playback
Z2 Z3
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH / PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MAIN
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
D E F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
SLEEP
Settings
Tips
Appendix
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
159
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Using the sleep timer
1 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set. 0 The B indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer starts. 0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in steps of 10 minutes.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Checking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation. The remaining time appears on the display.
o To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select "Off". The B indicator on the display turns off.
0 The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE 0 The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this
unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
160
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Quick select plus function
Z2 Z3
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MAIN
QUICK SELECT 1 4
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons. You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch. By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment. The Quick Select Plus function can be memorized for each zone.
0 The QUICK SELECT button on main unit can only be used to operate the MAIN ZONE.
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
161
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Calling up the settings
1 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control.
The button for the selected zone is lit.
2 Press QUICK SELECT. The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up.
0 The default settings for the input source are as shown below.
GMAIN ZONEH / GZONE2H / GZONE3H
Button
Input source
QUICK SELECT 1
CBL/SAT
QUICK SELECT 2
Blu-ray
QUICK SELECT 3
Media Player
QUICK SELECT 4
HEOS Music
0 Volume is not registered to Quick Select Plus in the factory default settings. See "Changing the settings" to register volume to Quick Select Plus. (v p. 163)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
162
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Changing the settings
1 Set the items below to the settings you want to register.
The following settings from A to K can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
A Input source (v p. 91) B Volume (v p. 92) C Sound mode (v p. 141) D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFCTM) (v p. 193) E "Restorer" (v p. 190) F "Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)" (v p. 135) G "Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)" (v p. 137) H "Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode)" (v p. 138) I "All Zone Stereo" (v p. 139) J "Speaker Preset" (v p. 140) K "HDMI Video Output" (v p. 205)
2 Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the operating zone with the remote control. The button for the selected zone is lit.
3 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until "Quickz Memory", "Z2 Quickz Memory" or "Z3 Quickz Memory" appears on the display. The current settings will be memorized. z is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you pressed.
o Changing the Quick Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Quick Select name displayed on the TV screen or display of this unit can be changed to a different name. For the name change method, see "Quick Select Names". (v p. 266)
0 Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station is memorized.
0 Tuner / Internet Radio Station
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
163
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.
INFO u
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Disabling all key button operations
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ui to select "FP/VOL LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X are disabled.
X STATUS i
.
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ui to select "FP LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
164
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Canceling the Panel lock function
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ui to select "FP LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The Panel lock function is canceled.
0 Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
165
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit. By default, this function is disabled.
INFO u
X STATUS i
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ui to select "RC LOCK On". 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The infrared light receiving function is disabled.
Enabling the remote sensor function
1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.
2 Use ui to select "RC LOCK zOff". (z The currently set mode.)
3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
166
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
PC
Router
This unit
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Controlling the unit from a web control
1 Switch the "Network Control" setting to "Always On". (v p. 256)
2 Check the IP address of this unit with "Information". (v p. 251)
Tablet
.
0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. (v p. 85)
0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.
Network/Information
Friendly Name DHCP Connection IP Address MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Denon AVR-X4700H On Wired (Ethernet) 192.168.100.19 zzzzzz-000000 zzzzzz-000000
Checking the IP address.
Displays the current network settings of the AVR
.
3 Start up the web browser.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
167
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser's address box. For example, if the IP address of this unit is "192.168.100.19", enter "http://192.168.100.19".
http://192.168.100.19 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
.
5 When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
168
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE). You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connecting ZONE
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3. 0 "Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector" (v p. 169) 0 "Connection through the video output connector and speaker output
connector" (v p. 170) 0 "Connection through the video output connector and external power
amplifiers" (v p. 173)
o Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 6 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
This unit
HDMI ZONE2
HDMI
.
0 When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed down to 2-channel audio.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
169
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector
When "Assign Mode" in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 230)
n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2
n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3
MAIN ZONE This unit
ZONE2
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR
MAIN ZONE This unit
ZONE3
(L)
(R)
w qw q
.
or
(L) wq
(R) wq
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
170
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
n Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO
MAIN ZONE This unit
Settings
ZONE2
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR
Tips
Appendix
ZONE3
wq
or
wq
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
171
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
n Assign Mode: 5.1ch + ZONE2/3
MAIN ZONE This unit
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
ZONE2
ZONE3
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR
(L)
(R)
w qw q
or
(L) wq
(R) wq
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
172
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit's ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
ZONE3
This unit
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB PR
Power amplifier
or
AUX IN
L
L
R
R
.
Power amplifier AUX IN
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
173
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 If the input for ZONE2 and ZONE3 is set to "Source", all types of input signals can be listened to from ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0 If the input for ZONE2 is set to a specific source (like CBL/SAT), only analog signal or 2-channel PCM signal input (from HDMI connectors or digital connectors (OPTICAL/ COAXIAL)) can be listened to from ZONE2. To playback HDMI signal other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set "HDMI Audio" to "PCM". (v p. 265) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2. In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3. 0 When "Component Video Out" in the menu is set to "ZONE2", the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (v p. 209)
0 The menu screen is not output in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
174
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
Playback
Z2 Z3
Input source select buttons
MUTE :
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH/ PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
POWER X VOLUME df
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
DE F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Settings
Tips
Appendix
1 Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the zone mode. Z2 or Z3 button lights.
2 Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The j indicator on the display lights. 0 Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played. The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or ZONE3. 0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the input source changes.
0 Setting the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source" allows you to play the same content in MAIN ZONE and in ZONE2, regardless of the type of input signal.
0 Set the input source of ZONE2 as the "Source" by pressing the ZONE2 SOURCE button on the main unit.
0 If the MAIN ZONE input source is changed while ZONE2 is selected as the "Source", then ZONE2's input source will be changed to mirror the MAIN ZONE's input source.
0 As well as ZONE2, you can play the same content of MAIN ZONE when the input source of ZONE3 is set as "Source".
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
175
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3)
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume. 0 At time of purchase, "Volume Limit" is set to "70 (10 dB)".
(v p. 265)
0 Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.
o Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/ZONE3)
Press MUTE :. The sound is reduced to the level set at "Mute Level" in the menu. (v p. 266) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
176
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV. The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Setting items
Detailed items
Description
Page
Center Level Adjust
Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.
182
Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.
182
Bass Sync
Adjusts the phase shift when there is a delay in the bass (LFE) recorded on a disc.
183
.
Audio
Surround Parameter Restorer
Adjusts surround sound parameters.
183
Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as
190
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.
Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
191
Volume
Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
192
Audyssey
Makes Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic
193
Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM settings.
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
196
Picture Adjust
Adjusts picture quality.
198
HDMI Setup
Makes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.
200
Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.
205
.
Component Video Out
Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2.
209
Video
On Screen Display
Configures the on-screen display settings.
209
Screen Saver
Select the screen saver setting.
210
4K/8K Signal Format
Sets signal format options for your 4K or 8K video equipment.
211
HDCP Setup
Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.
212
TV Format
Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
213
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
177
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Setting items
.
Inputs
Detailed items Input Assign Source Rename Hide Sources Source Level
Audyssey® Setup
Manual Setup
.
Speakers
.
Network
Information Connection Settings Network Control Friendly Name
Diagnostics AirPlay
Description Changes input connector assignment and the audio input mode. Changes the display name for input source. Removes from the display input sources that are not used. Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. Sets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey® Setup settings.
Page 214 217 217 218
219
230
Displays network information.
251
Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN.
251
Used for manually setting the IP address.
254
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
256
The "Friendly Name" is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change
256
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
Used to check the network connection.
257
Settings for Apple AirPlay.
257
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
178
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Setting items
Detailed items
Description
When the user is signed out the HEOS Account
I have a HEOS Account Selects to sign in.
Create Account
Creates new HEOS Account.
.
Forgot Password
HEOS Account
If you forgot your password, we'll send you an email with instructions about how to reset it.
When the user is signed in the HEOS Account
Signed in As
Displays your HEOS Account.
Change Location
Selects your location.
Change Password
Changes your HEOS Account Password.
Delete Account
Deletes your HEOS Account.
Sign Out
Sign out of your HEOS Account.
Page
258 258 258
258 258 258 258 258
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
179
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Setting items
.
General
Detailed items Language ECO Bluetooth Transmitter ZONE2 Setup/ ZONE3 Setup Zone Rename Quick Select Names Trigger Out 1/ Trigger Out 2 Front Display Firmware
Information Usage Data Save & Load Setup Lock Reset Begin Setup...
Language Select
Speaker Setup
.
Setup Assistant Speaker Calibration Network Setup
TV Audio Connection
Input Setup
Mobile Apps
Description Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. Sets Bluetooth transmitter settings. Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. Changes the Quick Select Name display title to one you prefer. Select the conditions for activating trigger out function.
Makes settings related to the display on this unit. Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display. Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon. Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device. Protects settings from inadvertent changes. Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen. Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
Page 259 259 263 264
266 266 267
267 268
271 273 273 274 274 Page 9 of the separate manual "Quick Start Guide"
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
180
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
uio p ENTER
BACK
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH / PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MAIN SETUP
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
. /
ABC
D E F SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Menu operations
1 Press MAIN on the remote control unit to set the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The MAIN button lights.
2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3 Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.
4 Use o p to change to desired setting. 5 Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0 To return to the previous item, press BACK. 0 Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
181
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Center Level Adjust
Adjusts the center channel volume to clarify the dialog for all sources.
o Center
Adjusts the volume output from the center channel. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0 This setting is also reflected in the center channel level in the "Speakers" "Levels" menu settings. (v p. 244)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Subwoofer Level Adjust
Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.
o Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2
Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0 This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the "Speakers" "Levels" menu settings. (v p. 244)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
182
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Bass Sync
For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed. This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).
0 ms 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0 How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this to the desired value.
0 "Bass Sync" settings are stored for each input source. 0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal.
Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences. The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode.
0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.
o Cinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity.
On:
Off (Default):
"Cinema EQ" is used. "Cinema EQ" is not used.
0 This item cannot be set when sound mode is "Direct", "Pure Direct", "Stereo" and "Original sound modes".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
183
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Loudness Management
This sets whether to output as specified in "Dynamic Compression" or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.
On (Default):
Off:
Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in "Dynamic Compression" and Dialogue normalization function.
"Dynamic Compression" settings and Dialogue normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.
0 "Loudness Management" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Dynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Auto: Low / Medium / High: Off:
Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.
These set the compression level.
Dynamic range compression is always off.
0 "Dynamic Compression" can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.
0 The default setting is "Off". When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is "Auto".
0 "Auto" cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
184
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Dialog Control
Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily. 0 6 (Default : 0)
0 This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.
o Low Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
-10 dB 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)
0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal. 0 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is
played. 0 For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below. 0 Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB 0 DTS movie sources: 0 dB 0 DTS music sources: -10 dB
o Speaker Virtualizer
The Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an enveloping virtual surround effect.
On (Default):
Off:
Enables "Speaker Virtualizer". Disables "Speaker Virtualizer".
0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Dolby Atmos", "Dolby Surround" or sound mode that has "+Dolby Surround" in the sound mode name.
0 Usable when not using height, ceiling or "Dolby Atmos Enabled" speakers, or when not using surround speakers.
0 Audio is not output when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" in the menu is set to "1 spkr". (v p. 239)
o DTS Neural:X
DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration.
On (Default):
Off:
Use "DTS Neural:X". Do not use "DTS Neural:X".
0 You can set this when sound mode is "DTS:X" or "DTS:X MSTR".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
185
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o IMAX
Sets the audio mode for IMAX playback.
Auto (Default):
On:
Off:
Automatically enables the IMAX mode when IMAX content is detected.
Enables IMAX settings for IMAX streaming content when automatic detection is not possible.
Disables the IMAX mode.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o IMAX Audio Settings
You can configure special IMAX audio settings to recreate the conditions of an IMAX theater.
Auto (Default):
Manual:
Applies the optimized speaker settings to reproduce similar to the IMAX theater environment.
Manually adjusts the "High Pass Filter", "Low Pass Filter" and "Subwoofer Mode".
0 In case of streaming the IMAX contents from online streaming service using TV Apps or player Apps (such as Blu-ray player's App), this unit may not detect the signal as IMAX contents automatically. In this case, you can enable IMAX mode by setting this parameter to "On" manually.
0 This setting can only be turned "On" when DTS 5.1 channel content recorded as IMAX DTS is input.
0 This setting cannot be set when headphones are used.
0 You can set this when sound mode is "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X". 0 "Speakers" - "Crossovers", "Bass" - "Subwoofer Mode" and "LPF for LFE" in
the menu cannot be applied during IMAX playback.
o High Pass Filter
Set the high pass filter cutoff frequency for all speakers during IMAX playback.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
186
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Low Pass Filter
Set the low pass filter cutoff frequency of the LFE signal during IMAX playback.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)
0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".
o Subwoofer Mode
Set the bass signal to be played by the subwoofer during IMAX playback.
On:
Off (Default):
The low range signal of all speakers is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. The LFE signal and the bass component of each speaker is played.
Only the LFE signal is played.
0 You can set this when "IMAX Audio Settings" is set to "Manual".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Auro-Matic 3D Preset
Selects the Auro-Matic 3D Preset for fine tuning the Auro-3D experience to specific audio material.
Small: Medium (Default): Large:
Movie:
Speech:
"Small" is ideal for pop and chamber music.
"Medium" is best used on jazz music or typical movies and TV shows.
"Large" is ideal for recordings that were recorded in large spaces (e.g. orchestral recording).
"Movie" is ideal for experiencing a largecinema effect for watching movies (e.g. action movies with big explosions).
"Speech" is ideal for recordings which are mostly dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and that have virtually no inherent spatial information.
0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a Height channel.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
187
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Auro-Matic 3D Strength
Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original input signal. The value ranges from 1 (no up-mixing) to 16 (Maximum level, providing maximum effect).
1 - 16 (Default:10)
0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D. 0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a
Height channel.
o Auro-3D Mode
Select how to output sound to all speakers when Auro-3D decoding is active.
Channel Expansion (Default):
Direct:
Incoming Auro-3D content is expanded to additional speakers. All speakers configured for Auro-3D will output sound.
Incoming Auro-3D content is sent directly to each corresponding channel. No content is sent to additional speakers.
o Delay Time
Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field image. 0 ms 300 ms (Default: 30 ms)
0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Matrix".
o Effect Level
Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode. 1 15 (Default: 10)
0 This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
0 Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.
0 You can set this when the input signal contains Auro-3D signal and sound mode is set to Auro-3D.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
188
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Room Size
Determine size of acoustic environment.
Small: Medium small: Medium (Default): Medium large: Large:
Simulate acoustics of a small room. Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room. Simulate acoustics of a large room.
0 This item can be set when sound mode is "Rock Arena", "Jazz Club", "Mono Movie" and "Video Game".
0 "Room Size" does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Speaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
Floor:
Floor & Height (Default):
Plays back without height speakers. Plays back with height speakers.
0 This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.
o Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
On (Default):
Off:
The subwoofer is used. The subwoofer is not used.
0 You can set this when the sound mode is "Direct" or "Stereo" and in the menu "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE+Main". (v p. 246)
o Set Defaults
The "Surround Parameter" settings are returned to the default settings.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
189
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Restorer
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The "Restorer" function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.
o Mode
High:
Medium: Low: Off:
Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).
Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).
Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).
Do not use "Restorer".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0 This item default setting for "HEOS Music" is "Low". All others are set to "Off". 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 "Restorer" settings are stored for each input source.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
190
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
0 Audio Delay for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (v p. 206)
0 "Audio Delay" settings are stored for each input source.
o Auto Lip Sync
Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync.
On (Default):
Off:
Correct automatically. Do not correct automatically.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Adjust
The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be corrected manually.
0 ms 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0 You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by "Auto Lip Sync".
0 Adjust for game mode can be set when "Video Mode" is set to "Auto" or "Game". (v p. 206)
0 Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of your TV even when "Auto Lip Sync" is set to "On".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
191
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
o Scale
Set how volume is displayed.
0 - 98 (Default):
-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB:
Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
Display ---dB (Min), in the range 79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.
0 "Scale" settings are reflected in all the zones.
o Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume. 60 80 (20 dB 0 dB) Off (Default)
o Power On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last (Default):
Mute:
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB) :
Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
The volume is adjusted to the set level.
0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (v p. 192)
o Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full (Default):
40 dB :
20 dB :
The sound is muted entirely.
The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is "-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB". (v p. 192)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
192
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Audyssey®
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM. These can be selected after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see "Explanation of terms" (v p. 319).
0 "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Reference Level Offset", "Dynamic Volume", "Audyssey LFCTM" and "Containment Amount" settings are stored for each input source.
0 When the sound mode is in the "Direct" or "Pure Direct" mode, "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFCTM" settings cannot be configured.
0 When the sound mode is in "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode that have "+Virtual:X" in the sound mode name, "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFCTM" settings cannot be configured.
0 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
0 "MultEQ® XT32", "Dynamic EQ", "Dynamic Volume" and "Audyssey LFCTM" cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o MultEQ® XT32
MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the "Reference" setting.
Reference (Default): L/R Bypass:
Flat: Off:
Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies, which is optimized for movies.
Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left and right speakers.
Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.
Do not use "MultEQ® XT32".
0 When using headphones, "MultEQ® XT32" is automatically set to "Off".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
193
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Dynamic EQ
Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On (Default):
Off:
Use "Dynamic EQ". Do not use "Dynamic EQ".
0 When the menu "Dynamic EQ" setting is "On", it is not possible to do "Tone" adjustment. (v p. 136)
0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.
0 dB (Film Reference) (Default): 5 dB : 10 dB :
15 dB :
Optimized for content such as movies.
Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music. Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference. Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
0 Setting is enabled when "Dynamic EQ" is "On". (v p. 194)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
194
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Dynamic Volume
Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user's preferred volume setting.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
Heavy:
Medium:
Light: Off (Default):
Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds. Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound. Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Do not use "Dynamic Volume".
0 If "Dynamic Volume" is set to "Yes" in "Audyssey® Setup", the setting is automatically changed to "Medium". (v p. 219)
0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Audyssey LFCTM
Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On:
Off (Default):
Use "Audyssey LFCTM". Do not use "Audyssey LFCTM".
0 This item cannot be set when "MultEQ® XT32" in the menu is set to "Off".
o Containment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors. 1 7 (Default : 4)
0 This can be set when "Audyssey LFCTM" in the menu is set to "On".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
195
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
0 Speakers for which "Graphic EQ" can be set differ according to the sound mode. 0 This can be set when "MultEQ® XT32" setting is "Off". (v p. 193)
0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to "Direct" or "Pure Direct". 0 If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.
(v p. 196)
o Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ
Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On:
Off (Default):
Use the graphic equalizer. Do not use the graphic equalizer.
0 "Headphone EQ" is set in the menu when headphones are used.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Speaker Selection
Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers.
All:
Left/Right (Default):
Each:
Adjust all speaker tones together.
Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.
Adjust the tone for each speaker.
o Adjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band.
1. Select the speaker. 2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz 3. Adjust the level. 20.0 dB +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0 Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
196
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Curve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey® Setup.
0 "Curve Copy" is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed. 0 "Curve Copy" cannot be used when using headphones.
o Set Defaults
The "Graphic EQ" settings are returned to the default settings.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
197
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Video
Make video-related settings.
Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.
Playback
0 This can be set when the "Video Conversion" setting is "On". (v p. 206)
0 This can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source. (v p. 215)
0 "Contrast", "Brightness", "Saturation", "Noise Reduction" and "Enhancer" can be set when "Picture Mode" is set to "Custom". (v p. 198)
0 "Picture Adjust" settings are stored for each input source.
0 "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
0 "Picture Adjust" cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Picture Mode
Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.
Standard:
Movie:
Vivid:
Streaming:
ISF Day:
ISF Night: Custom: Off (Default):
The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.
A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.
A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.
A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.
Adjusts the picture quality manually.
No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
198
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 The two special adjustment modes, "ISF Day" and "ISF Night", should be used by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation conditions. We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISFcertified technician.
0 These settings can also be configured using "Picture Mode" in the option menu. (v p. 198)
Settings
Tips
o Contrast
Adjust picture contrast. -50 +50 (Default : 0)
o Brightness
Adjust picture brightness. -50 +50 (Default : 0)
o Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation). -50 +50 (Default : 0)
o Noise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise. Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)
o Enhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness. 0 +12 (Default : 0)
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
199
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.
NOTE 0 When "HDMI Pass Through" and "HDMI Control" is set to "On", it consumes more
standby power. ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
o HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
AVR (Default):
TV:
Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
Play back through TV connected to the unit.
o HDMI Pass Through
Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.
On (Default):
Off:
Transmits the selected HDMI input through this unit's HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.
No HDMI signals are transmitted through this unit's HDMI output in standby power mode.
0 When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (v p. 156)
0 When the power of this unit is on and "HDMI Audio Out" is set to "TV", audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
200
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Pass Through Source
Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.
Last:
The most recently used input source will go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD /
Blu-ray / Media Player /
Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CDz (Default : CBL/SAT):
Pass through the selected input source.
z"Pass Through Source" can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to "CD" for the input source in the "Input Assign" setting. (v p. 214)
0 "Pass Through Source" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202))
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o RC Source Select
Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select button on the remote control when this unit is on standby.
Power On + Source (Default):
Source Select Only:
The power of this unit is turned on and the input source changes.
The HDMI input source changes while this unit is on standby. The power display of this unit blinks when the input source select button of the remote control is pressed.
0 "RC Source Select" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On" or "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "On". ("HDMI Pass Through" (v p. 200), "HDMI Control" (v p. 202))
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
201
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o HDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control.
On:
Off (Default):
Use HDMI Control function. Do not use HDMI Control function.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o ARC
On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI.
On:
Off (Default):
Use ARC function. Do not use ARC function.
0 If using the HDMI Control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.
0 Refer to "HDMI Control function" for more information about the HDMI Control function. (v p. 156)
NOTE 0 If the "HDMI Control" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
0 You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control. 0 If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel)
and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV. 0 When "HDMI Control" is set to "On", the "ARC" settings automatically switch
"On". (v p. 202)
NOTE 0 If the "ARC" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change. 0 Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from
the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of "ARC" settings in the menu.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
202
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o TV Audio Switching
Sets automatic switching to the "TV Audio" input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit.
On (Default):
Off:
Select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
Do not select the "TV Audio" input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.
0 "TV Audio Switching" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)
o Power Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
All (Default):
Video:
Off:
If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
With an input source being selected that is assigned either "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO", when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (v p. 215)
This unit does not link with power to a TV.
0 "Power Off Control" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
203
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Power Saving
If "TV Speaker" is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption. This function is activated in the following cases. 0 When "TV Audio" is selected as the input source of this unit 0 When playing content from a device connected by HDMI
On:
Off (Default):
Use Power Saving function. Do not use Power Saving function.
0 "Power Saving" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Smart Menu
This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Tuner and Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.
On:
Use Smart Menu function.
Off:
Do not use Smart Menu function.
0 "Smart Menu" can be set when "HDMI Control" is set to "On". (v p. 202)
NOTE 0 If the "Smart Menu" settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change. 0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the
specifications of your TV. In this case, set "Smart Menu" to "Off".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
204
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.
0 This can be set when "HDMI", "COMP" or "VIDEO" is assigned for each input source. (v p. 215)
0 "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". ("Resolution" (v p. 207), "Sharpness" (v p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (v p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (v p. 208))
0 "Output Settings" cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input.
0 "Video Mode", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" cannot be set when sound mode is set to "IMAX DTS" or "IMAX DTS:X". ("Video Mode" (v p. 206), "i/p Scaler" (v p. 206), "Resolution" (v p. 207), "Sharpness" (v p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (v p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (v p. 208))
0 "Video Conversion", "Video Mode", "i/p Scaler", "Resolution", "Sharpness", "Progressive Mode" and "Aspect Ratio" settings are stored for each input source. ("Video Conversion" (v p. 206), "Video Mode" (v p. 206), "i/p Scaler" (v p. 206), "Resolution" (v p. 207), "Sharpness" (v p. 207), "Progressive Mode" (v p. 208), "Aspect Ratio" (v p. 208))
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o HDMI Video Output
Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.
Auto(Dual) (Default):
Monitor 1: Monitor 2:
The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is detected automatically, and that TV connection is used.
A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector is always used.
A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is always used.
0 If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are connected and "Resolution" is set to "Auto", the signals are output with a resolution that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 207) When the "Resolution" setting in the menu is not set to "Auto", set the resolution in "Video" - "HDMI Monitor 1" and "HDMI Monitor 2" to one that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 271)
0 You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in "HDMI Monitor 1" and "HDMI Monitor 2". (v p. 271)
0 When connecting multiple Dolby Vision TVs, the signal will only be optimal for one TV. A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector has priority.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
205
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Video Mode
Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content.
Auto (Default):
Game:
Movie:
Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.
Always process video for game content. Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.
Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.
0 If "Video Mode" is set to "Auto", the mode is switched according to the input contents.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Video Conversion
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV. (v p. 313)
On (Default):
Off:
The input video signal is converted. The input video signal is not converted.
o i/p Scaler
Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p Scaler processing.
i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the value set in "Resolution". (v p. 207)
Analog (Default): Analog & HDMI:
HDMI: Off:
Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler function for analog video signals.
Use i/p Scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
Use i/p Scaler function for HDMI video signals.
Do not use i/p Scaler function.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
206
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Resolution
Set the output resolution. You can set "Resolution" separately for HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.
Auto (Default):
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 4K / 8K :
The resolution supported by the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT connector is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.
Set the output resolution.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Sharpness
Enables the sharpness feature which enhances the edges of images when up-scaling video to 4K or 8K.
On:
Off (Default):
Enables the video enhancer sharpness feature to provide image edge contouring which is optimized for converting lower resolution standard definition video to 4K or 8K.
Disables the video enhancer sharpness feature.
0 When "i/p Scaler" is set to "Analog & HDMI", the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 206)
0 For the detail of upscaling, please refer to "Video conversion function" (v p. 314).
0 This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 206)
0 We recommend using this sharpness feature only when your TV sharpness is set to 0.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
207
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.
Auto (Default):
Video:
Video and Film:
The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.
Select mode suitable for video playback.
Select mode suitable for video and 30frame film material playback.
0 This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 206)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Aspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9 (Default):
4:3 :
Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except for 480p/576p output)
0 This item can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "Off". (v p. 206)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
208
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE (Default):
Assigns the component video output connector to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2:
Assigns the component video output connector to ZONE2.
On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
o Volume
Sets where to display the volume level.
Bottom (Default):
Top:
Off:
Display at the bottom.
Display at the top. Turn display off.
0 When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to "Top".
o Info
Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched.
On (Default):
Turn display on.
Off:
Turn display off.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
209
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Now Playing
Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is "HEOS Music" or "Tuner".
Always On (Default):
Auto Off:
Show display continuously.
Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Screen Saver
Select the screen saver setting.
A screen saver is activated if no operation is performed for more than 5 minutes when no video signal is input or when the same screen (e.g. the setup menu) is displayed. Use uio p to clear the screen saver.
On:
Off (Default):
Turns screen saver on. Turns screen saver off.
0 The screen saver is activated in the following cases.
0 When the setup menu is displayed 0 When no video signal is input 0 When the network, USB, Bluetooth or Tuner playback screen is displayed 0 This feature will be supported via firmware update.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
210
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
4K/8K Signal Format
Set the format of 4K and 8K signal to be played back by this unit when the TV or playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K or 8K signal compatible.
o 4K/8K Signal Format
Set the format of 4K and 8K signal played back by this unit.
Standard: Enhanced (Default):
8K Enhanced:
Select if your TV and playback devices support 4K 60p 4:2:0 8 bit video signals.
Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 4K 60p 4:4:4 8 bit, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.
Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 8K 60p or 4K 120p video signals.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
GRelation between the "4K/8K Signal Format" setting and supported resolutionsH
Support Resolution
Color Space
Pixel Depth
4K/8K Signal Format
Standard
Enhanced
8K Enhanced
4K 24p, RGB /
8 bit
P
P
P
4K 30p, YCbCr 4:4:4 10,12 bit
P
P
4K 25p
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit
P
P
P
8 bit
P
P
P
YCbCr 4:2:0
10,12 bit
P
P
4K 60p, 4K 50p
RGB /
8 bit
P
P
YCbCr 4:4:4 10,12 bit
P
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit
P
P
YCbCr 4:2:0
8,10,12 bit
P
4K 120p, 4K 100p
RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4
8,10 bit
P
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit
P
8K 24p,
YCbCr 4:2:0
8,10,12 bit
P
8K 30p, 8K 25p
RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4
8,10 bit
P
YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit
P
8K 60p, 8K 50p
YCbCr 4:2:0 8, 10 bit
P
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
211
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 When setting this to "Enhanced", we recommend using a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable" or "Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet" that has an "HDMI Premium Certified Cable" label attached to the product package.
0 When setting this to "8K Enhanced", we recommend using an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable".
0 When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", configure the television or playback device settings to match this setting.
0 When this setting is "Enhanced" or "8K Enhanced", video may not be output correctly depending on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this setting to "Standard".
0 "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.
0 "4K/8K Signal Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "zVideo Format <NTSC>" appears on the display.
2. Press i on the main unit.
"4K/8K Format <Enhanced>" appears on the display. 3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the 4K/8K Signal Format. 4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.
HDCP Setup
Sets the HDCP version for each HDMI input source.
Video may not be output depending on the HDCP version of your player and the TV.
If this issue occurs, use this setting to set one version of HDCP. This may be able to output video.
Auto (Default):
1.4:
2.3:
Automatically applies the HDCP version of this unit according to TV.
Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 1.4.
Fixes the HDCP version of this unit to 2.3.
0 "Custom" is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDCP version for this unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
212
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
o Format
NTSC (Default):
PAL:
Select NTSC output. Select PAL output.
0 "Format" can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting. 1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "zVideo Format <NTSC>" appears on the display. 2. Use the main unit's o or p and set the video signal format. 3. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.
NOTE 0 When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
213
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback. You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input connector and video input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
Sets the audio input mode for each "INPUT MODE" source. "AUTO" is normally recommended for this setting. This automatically detects and plays signal input to this unit prioritized in the following order: HDMI > DIGITAL > ANALOG.
Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray Media Player Game AUX 8K TV Audio CD
HDMI
1 2 3 4 5 FRONT 7(8K) -
DIGITAL ANALOG
COAX1 1 COAX2 2
-3 OPT2 -
-4 --OPT1 -5
VIDEO
VIDEO1 COMP1 VIDEO2 COMP2 VIDEO3
-
INPUT MODE
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO HDMI HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG
Changes HDMI input assignments
.
0 By default, each item is set as follows.
Input source
Input connector HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG
CBL/SAT
1
COAX1
1
DVD
2
COAX2
2
Blu-ray
3
3
Media Player
4
OPT2
Game
5
4
AUX
FRONT
8K
7(8K)
TV Audio
OPT1
CD
5
VIDEO VIDEO1 COMP1 VIDEO2 COMP2 VIDEO3
INPUT MODE
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO HDMI HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
214
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
n TV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Input Assign" - "DIGITAL", you will also need to select "DIGITAL" in the "INPUT MODE".
0 The same input connector can be assigned to multiple input sources. For example, assign the same HDMI input connector to multiple sources to use each input source in combination with analog or digital audio as you prefer. In such cases, set the audio connector for playback in "INPUT MODE".
o HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7(8K) / Assign an HDMI input connector to the
FRONT:
selected input source.
:
Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.
0 Only "HDMI7" can be assigned to the "8K" input source.
0 When "HDMI Control" or "ARC" is set to "On" in the menu, "HDMI" cannot be assigned to "TV Audio". ("HDMI Control" (v p. 202), "ARC" (v p. 202))
0 The eARC function does not operate when "HDMI" is set as the "TV Audio" input source.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:
:
Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.
o ANALOG
Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5: :
Assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a analog audio input connector to the selected input source.
o VIDEO
Set this to change the component video input connectors and composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources.
COMP1 (Component video) / COMP2 / VIDEO1 / VIDEO2 / VIDEO3:
:
Assign the video input connector to the selected input source.
Do not assign a video input connector to the selected input source.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
215
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o INPUT MODE
Set the audio input modes for each input source. It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to "AUTO".
AUTO (Default):
Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI:
Play only signals from HDMI input.
DIGITAL:
Play only signals from digital audio input.
ANALOG:
Play only signals from analog audio input.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Set Defaults
The "Input Assign" settings are returned to the default settings.
0 When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display. If the ~ indicator does not light, check "Input Assign" and the connections. (v p. 214)
0 If "HDMI Control" is set to "On" and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to ARC.
0 When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, the input mode whose input source is "TV Audio" is fixed to eARC.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
216
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Source Rename
0 Changes the display name of the input source. Once changed, the name is displayed on the display and menu screens of this unit.
0 If the device name can be acquired from a connected HDMI device, the display name is changed automatically. Use this function to change names as needed when the device you are using differs from the input source on this unit.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Media Player / Game / AUX / 8K / TV Audio / CD / Phono:
Change the display name for input source.
Set Defaults:
The "Source Rename" settings are returned to the default settings.
Hide Sources
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show (Default):
Use this source.
Hide:
Do not use this source.
0 Up to 16 characters can be input.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
217
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input. Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
o Source Level n When the input source is set to "HEOS Music" or
"Tuner"
-12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs n When the input source is set other than to "HEOS
Music" or "Tuner"
-12dB +12dB (Default : 0dB)
0 The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "ANALOG" is assigned at "Input Assign". (v p. 214)
0 The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which "DIGITAL" is assigned at "Input Assign". (v p. 214)
0 "Source Level" settings are stored for each input source.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
218
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called "Audyssey® Setup". You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed "Speaker Calibration" in "Setup Assistant". To set up the speakers manually, use "Manual Setup" on the menu. (v p. 230)
Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions). When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position (main listening position).
FL SW C
FR
( :Measuring positions)
FL Front speaker (L) FR Front speaker (R) C Center speaker SW Subwoofer SL Surround speaker (L) SR Surround speaker (R)
0 If you perform Audyssey® Setup, Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM functions are enabled. (v p. 193)
SL
Listening position
SR
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
219
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o About the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
o About Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM
Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM makes the integration of dual subwoofers seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both subwoofers together. To run Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM you must select "Measure (2 spkrs)" in "Channel Select". (v p. 222).
Settings
Tips
Appendix
NOTE
0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
220
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup)
Preparation
Measurement
Calculation & Store
Check
Finish
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position. When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below. n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to "On" and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings: 0 Volume : 12 o'clock position 0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency 0 Low pass filter : Off 0 Standby mode : Off
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
221
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
When the Sound calibration microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.
.
Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup
Start
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
4 Select "Start", then press ENTER. Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings. 0 Amp Assign The signals output from the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker environment. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 230)) 0 Channel Select If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers and subwoofer. 0 Dolby Speaker Setup Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled, Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press "Next" to proceed further.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
222
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
6 When the following screen is displayed, select "Begin Test" and then press ENTER. Start the measurement of the first position.
Audyssey Setup Select "Begin Test" to start the calibration. NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping during the tests.
Ear Height
Settings
Tips
Appendix
7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select "Next" and then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup Speaker Detection
Front Center Subwoofer Surround Surr. Back
:Yes :Yes :1spkr :Yes :No
Back
Begin Test
.
0 Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
0 If "Caution!" is displayed on TV screen: 0 Go to "Error messages" (v p. 227). Check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures. 0 If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is displayed. See "Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust" (v p. 228).
Repeat Last Test
.
Next
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
223
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select "Continue", then press ENTER. The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
Audyssey Setup Place the microphone ear level of the listener seated at the 2nd listening position, which should be no more than 2 ft (60 cm) away from the 1st position, then select "Continue"...
Ear Height
Settings
Tips
Appendix
9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
0 To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press o to select "Complete" and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
10 Select "Continue", then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup Measurements complete. Select "Continue" to analyze the data...
Back
Continue
.
n Stopping Audyssey® Setup
A Press BACK to display the popup screen. B Press o to select "Yes", then press ENTER.
Repeat Last Test
Continue
.
Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.
NOTE
0 When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not turned off.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
224
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.
Audyssey Setup Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies and television.
Turn on Dynamic EQ?
Yes No
Analyzing room data 0%
.
0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume. This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.
0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.
12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press "Next".
Audyssey Setup Now Analyzing and correcting your room data. Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.
Applying room corrections Back
100% Next
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
225
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 When performing Audyssey® Setup for the first time, the measurement data is automatically saved to "Preset 1" of "Speaker Preset".
0 If Audyssey® Setup has already been performed, the following "Speaker Preset" selection screen is displayed.
Audyssey Setup Select which Preset to use. Preset 1 is already used, selecting Preset 1 now will overwrite the previously stored setting.
Preset 1 Preset 2
Analyzing room data 0%
Back
.
0 See "Speaker Preset" for detailed information on the Speaker Preset function. (v p. 250)
13 Select "Details" and press ENTER to verify the measurement results. 0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.
NOTE 0 Do not enable new speakers in speaker configuration menu after Audyssey®
Setup. If it is changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
226
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples
Error details
Measures
No speakers found.
0 Sound calibration microphone is not detected.
0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
0 Not all speakers could be detected.
0 Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too 0 There is too much noise in the room. low
0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away. 0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low.
0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.
0 Adjust the subwoofer's volume.
Front R : None
0 The displayed speaker could not be detected.
0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase
0 The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.
0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press p to select "Ignore", then press ENTER.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
227
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup measurement is 75 dB. During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 78 dB range. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
G Error message H
Audyssey Setup Your Subwoofer 1's level is too high. If your subwoofer has a volume control on it, select "SW Level Matching" to interactively adjust the level of your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select "Skip".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
1 Select "SW Level Matching" and then press ENTER. 2 Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3 When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range, select "Next" and then press ENTER. 0 If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer's adjustment will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.
Back
.
Skip
SW Level Matching
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
228
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set "Restore..." to "Restore", you can return to Audyssey® Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even when you have changed each setting manually.
Audyssey Setup Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.
Amp Assign Channel Select Dolby Speaker Setup Check Results
Restore...
Start
.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
229
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey® Setup. 0 If you enable new speakers in the speaker configuration menu after
performing Audyssey® Setup, you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 193) 0 Changing the following settings: Speaker size (Large or Small) / Distances / Levels / Crossovers settings will not disable Audyssey® or require running Audyssey® Setup again. 0 "Manual Setup" can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Amp Assign
Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
o Assign Mode
Select how to use the power amp. You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.
11.1ch:
0 Setting to use the 9-channel power amplifier in this unit and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT to play back up to 11.1-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
230
Remote
Index
Contents
9.1ch:
7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default):
Connections
Playback
0 Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to MAIN ZONE to play back up to 9.1-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 9.1channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
7.1ch + ZONE3: 5.1ch + ZONE2/3: 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO:
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE3 to 2-channels
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different channel.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
231
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
7.1ch (Bi-Amp):
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp
5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2: connection to 2-channels.
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
7.1ch + Front B: Pre Amplifier:
0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for connecting the second set of front speakers.
0 You can switch between the desired combination of front speakers A and front speakers B.
Switch the front speaker using the "Front Speaker" setting. (v p. 247)
0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1-channels for MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode.
0 All of the speakers are connected using an external power amplifier and this unit is used as an integrated amplifier.
0 When "Assign Mode" is set to "7.1ch + ZONE2", "7.1ch (Bi-Amp)" or "7.1ch + Front B" in the menu, the assigned channels are output from HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
0 When Assign Mode is set to "5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2" in the menu, the front channels for Bi-Amp connection are output from HEIGHT1 speaker terminals, and the ZONE2 channels are output from HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
232
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Floor
Select the floor speakers location.
5ch & SB (Default):
5ch:
This layout combines a surround back speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.
This is a basic 5-channel layout that uses front speakers, center speakers and surround speakers.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Height n Height Sp
Select the number of the height speakers and ceiling speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
None:
Uses no height and ceiling speakers.
2ch (Default):
Uses a set of (two) height speakers or ceiling speakers.
4ch: 5ch:
Uses two sets of (four) height speakers or ceiling speakers.
Uses five height speakers z
z If "5ch" is selected, connect the Top Surround speaker to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal.
n Dolby Sp
Select the number of the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
None (Default):
Uses no Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
2ch:
Uses a set of (two) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
4ch:
Uses two sets of (four) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
233
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n Layout
Select the height, ceiling, or Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker location.
The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of "Assign Mode" and "Floor" in the menu. ("Assign Mode" (v p. 230), "Floor" (v p. 233))
Settings
AUDIO OUT connectors
Height Sp
Dolby Sp
NOTE
Layout
HEIGHT 1
HEIGHT 2
None
None
-
-
-
Front Height (Default)
Front Height
-
Top Front
Top Front
-
2ch
None
Top Middle
Top Middle
-
Top Rear
Top Rear
-
Rear Height
Rear Height
-
Front Height & Top Middle
Front Height
Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear
Front Height
Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Heightz2
Front Height
Rear Height
4ch
None
z1
Front Height & Surr. Height
Front Height
Surr. Height
Top Front & Top Rear
Top Front
Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height
Top Front
Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height
Top Middle
Rear Height
Front Dolby
Front Dolby
-
None
2ch
Surround Dolby
Surround Dolby
-
Back Dolbyz3
Back Dolby
-
z1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" in the menu. z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup
in place of Surround Height speakers. z3 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" and "Floor" is set to "5ch & SB" in the menu.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
234
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Height Sp 2ch None
Dolby Sp 2ch
Settings NOTE
z1
4ch
z1
Layout Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height & Back Dolbyz4 Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front & Back Dolbyz4 Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby & Back Dolbyz4
z1 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" or "9.1ch" in the menu. z4 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" and "Floor" is set to "5ch & SB" in the menu.
Tips
Appendix
AUDIO OUT connectors
HEIGHT 1
HEIGHT 2
Front Dolby
Top Rear
Front Dolby
Rear Height
Front Height
Surround Dolby
Front Height
Back Dolby
Top Front
Surround Dolby
Top Front
Back Dolby
Front Dolby
Surround Dolby
Front Dolby
Back Dolby
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
235
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Height Sp 5ch
Dolby Sp None
Settings NOTE
z5
Layout Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height & Rear Heightz2
AUDIO OUT connectors
HEIGHT1
HEIGHT2
SUBWOOFER2
Front Height
Surr. Height
Top Surround
Front Height
Rear Height
Top Surround
z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.
z5 This can be selected when "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch" in the menu.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
236
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Pre-out
When "Assign Mode" is set to "11.1ch", selects the PRE OUT connector the external power amplifier used in MAIN ZONE. The PRE OUT connectors that can be selected differ depending on the combination of "Floor" and "Height" - "Layout" settings configured in the menu.
o View Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT connectors for your "Amp Assign" setting on the menu screen.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
237
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Speaker Config.
Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low bass frequencies and speaker size.
0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.
o Front
Set the front speaker size.
Large (Default):
Small:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
0 When "Subwoofer" is set to "No", "Front" is automatically set to "Large".
0 When "Front" is set to "Small", you cannot set speakers other than "Front" to "Large".
o Center
Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when a center speaker is not connected.
o Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
2 spkrs: 1 spkr (Default):
None:
Use two subwoofers.
Use only one subwoofer.
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
0 When "Subwoofer" is set to "None" and you set "Front" to "Small", "Subwoofer" is automatically set to "1 spkr".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
238
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Surround
Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
0 When "Surround" is set to "None", "Surr. Back", "Surround Dolby" and "Back Dolby" are automatically set to "None".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Surr. Back
Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
2 spkrs (Default):
1 spkr:
Use two surround back speakers.
Use only one surround back speaker. Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND BACK when this setting is selected.
0 When "Surr. Back" is set to "None" or "1 spkr", "Back Dolby" is automatically set to "None".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
239
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Front Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
o Front Dolby
Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the front Dolby speakers are not connected.
o Top Front
Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top front speakers are not connected.
o Top Middle
Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top middle speakers are not connected.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
240
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Surround Dolby
Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround Dolby speakers are not connected.
o Top Rear
Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top rear speakers are not connected.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Surr. Height
Set the presence and size of the surround height speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the surround height speakers are not connected.
0 When "Front Height" is set to "None", "Surr. Height" is automatically set to "None".
o Rear Height
Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the rear height speakers are not connected.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
241
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Back Dolby
Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the back Dolby speakers are not connected.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Top Surround
Set the presence and size of the top surround speaker.
Large:
Small (Default):
None:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
Select when the top surround speaker is not connected.
0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in "Amp Assign" are set to "None", "None" is automatically set for Height2.
0 When "Surr. Height" or "Rear Height" is set to "None", "Top Surround" is automatically set to "None".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
242
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers. Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.
o Unit
Set the unit of distance. Feet (Default) Meters
o Step
Set the minimum variable width of the distance. 1 ft / 0.1 ft (Default: 1 ft) 0.1 m / 0.01 m
Settings
Tips
o Set the distance
0.0 ft 60.0 ft / 0.00 m 18.00 m
Appendix
0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the "Amp Assign" and "Speaker Config." settings. ("Amp Assign" (v p. 230), "Speaker Config." (v p. 238))
0 Default settings: Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Front Dolby L / Front Dolby R / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 12.0 ft (3.60 m) Speakers other than the above: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00 m).
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
243
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Dolby Speaker Setup
Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. 3.0 ft - 11.0 ft / 0.90 m - 3.30 m (Default: 6.0 ft / 1.80 m)
0 This can be set when "Front Dolby", "Surround Dolby" or "Back Dolby" is set to "Large" or "Small" in "Speaker Config.".
o Set Defaults
The "Distances" settings are returned to the default settings.
Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.
o Test Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker. While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0 The set "Levels" are reflected in all sound modes. 0 If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in "Channel Level Adjust". (v p. 135) 0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set "Levels".
o Set Defaults
The "Levels" settings are returned to the default settings.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
244
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Crossovers
Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
o Speaker Selection
Selects how to set the crossover frequency.
All (Default):
Individual:
Sets the same crossover frequency for all speakers.
Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Set the crossover frequency
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
0 "Crossovers" can be set when the "Subwoofer Mode" setting is "LFE+Main", or when you have a speaker that is set to "Small". (v p. 246)
0 The default crossover frequency is "80 Hz", which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to "250 Hz" when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz 20 kHz.
0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers set in "Small". This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
0 The speakers that can be set when "Individual" is selected differ depending on to the "Subwoofer Mode" setting. (v p. 246)
0 When "LFE" is selected, speakers set to "Small" at "Speaker Config." can be set. If the speakers are set to "Large", "Full Band" is displayed and the setting cannot be made. (v p. 238)
0 When "LFE+Main" is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the "Speaker Config." setting. (v p. 238)
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 186)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
245
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
o Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE (Default):
LFE+Main:
The low range signal of the channel set to "Small" speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
o LPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer. 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 186)
0 "Subwoofer Mode" can be set when "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to other than "None". (v p. 238)
0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0 If "Speaker Config." - "Front" and "Center" are set to "Large", and "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE", no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 238) Select "LFE+Main" if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
0 The audio settings in "IMAX Audio Settings" are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 186)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
246
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Front Speaker
Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A (Default):
Front speaker A is used.
B :
Front speaker B is used.
A+B :
Both front speakers A and B are used.
0 This can be set when "Assign Mode" is set to "7.1ch + Front B". (v p. 232)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
2ch Playback
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.
o Setting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.
Auto (Default):
Manual:
The settings in "Speakers" are applied. (v p. 219)
Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the following settings:
o Front
Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.
Large (Default):
Small:
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.
Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.
0 When "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to "None", "Large" is automatically set. (v p. 238)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
247
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Subwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes (Default):
No:
Use a subwoofer.
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
0 When "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu is set to "None", No is automatically set. (v p. 238)
If the "Front" setting is "Small", the setting is automatically "Yes".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o SW Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE (Default):
LFE+Main:
When "2ch Playback" - "Front" is set to "Large", only LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also, when "2ch Playback" - "Front" is set to "Small", the front channel low range signals are added to the LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.
The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
0 This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
248
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Crossover
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)
Settings
Tips
o Level FL / Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel. -12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)
0 This can be set when "2ch Playback" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes". 0 When "2ch Playback" - "Front" is set to "Large" and "SW Mode" is set to "LFE",
"Full Band" is displayed and this cannot be set.
o Distance FL / Distance FR
Set distance from main listening position to speaker. 0.0 ft 60.0 ft (Default: 12.0 ft) / 0.00 m 18.00 m (Default: 3.60 m)
0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00 m).
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
249
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Speaker Preset
Two speaker settings can be saved to suit the environments where you use your speakers.
For example, you can configure two presets easily to switch between equalizer or speaker settings measured using Audyssey® Setup if the characteristics of your room differ depending on factors such as whether you use the screen.
If you want to use a preset, select the preset you want to use and then configure settings such as Audyssey® Setup or the speaker settings to save those settings to the preset you have selected.
Preset 1 (Default):
Preset 2:
Saves the settings to Preset 1. Saves the settings to Preset 2.
0 The following settings are saved to presets.
0 "Amp Assign" settings 0 "Speaker Config." settings 0 "Distances" settings 0 "Levels" settings 0 "Crossovers" settngs 0 "Bass" settings 0 "2ch Playback" settings 0 "Front Speaker" settings 0 "MultEQ® XT32" data 0 "Graphic EQ" data 0 This setting also be configured using "Speaker Preset" in the option menu. (v p. 140)
Settings
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
250
Remote
Tips
Appendix
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings. If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set "DHCP" to "On". (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN). When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the "IP Address" settings, and enter information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.
Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) / Wi-Fi signal strength
Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select "Wired (Ethernet)" after connecting a LAN cable. When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select "Wireless (WiFi)" and configure the "Wi-Fi Setup". (v p. 252)
o Connect Using
Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Wired (Ethernet): Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Default):
Use a LAN cable to connect to a network. Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
251
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router. The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.
o Scan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen. 1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks. Select "Rescan" if the network cannot be found. 2. Enter your password and select "OK".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Use iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device.
1. Select "Use iOS Device" on the TV screen. 2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-
Fi) router and select "Denon AVR-X4700H" from "SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER..." at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device. 3. Tap "Next" on the screen of the iOS device.
0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
252
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o WPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button method. 1. Select "Push Button" on the TV screen. 2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router
you wish to connect to. 0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router. 3. Select "Connect" on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Manual
Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to.
1. Set the following items.
SSID: Security: Password:
Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.
Input the password.
2. Select "Connect" at the end of the setting.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
253
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
1. Press and hold the DIMMER and STATUS buttons on the main unit for at least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to "Denon AVR-X4700H" when the message "Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called "Denon AVR-X4700H"." appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter "192.168.1.16/settings/" in the URL. 4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select "Connect" and then exit the
settings.
0 The Default key of this unit is fixed at "1". Set Default key of the router to "1" to use.
Settings
Configure the IP address. 0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to "On" in the default settings of this unit. 0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function.
Network/Settings
DHCP -IP Address -Subnet Mask -Default Gateway -DNS
Off 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
Save Cancel Configures the network settings automatically or manually
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
254
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o DHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On (Default):
Off:
Configure the network settings automatically from your router.
Configure the network settings manually.
o IP Address
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. 0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set. CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254 CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254 CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254
o Subnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input "255.255.255.0".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Default Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
o DNS
Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider.
0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (v p. 85)
0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
255
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Network Control
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
Off In Standby:
Suspend network function during standby.
Always On (Default):
Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.
0 When using the web control function, Denon 2016 AVR Remote App or HEOS App, use with the "Network Control" setting set to "Always On".
NOTE 0 When "Network Control" is set to "Always On", the unit consumes more standby
power.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
o Friendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list. When you select "Other", you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other
0 Up to 30 characters can be input. 0 The default Friendly Name on first use is "Denon AVR-X4700H".
o Set Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
256
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Diagnostics
Used to check the network connection.
o Physical Connection
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
OK Error:
The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.
0 When connected using a wireless LAN, "Connection be displayed.
o Router Access
Wireless (Wi-Fi)" will
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK Error:
Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router settings.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Internet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK Error:
Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.
AirPlay
Settings for Apple AirPlay.
On (Default): Off:
Enables Apple AirPlay. Disables Apple AirPlay.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
257
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
HEOS Account
Make HEOS Account-related settings. HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites. The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.
You have not signed in
o I have a HEOS Account
If you already have a HEOS Account, enter the current account name and password to sign in.
o Create Account
If you do not have a HEOS Account, create a new HEOS Account.
o Forgot Password
If you have forgotten the password, an email explaining how to reset the password will be sent.
You have already signed in
o Signed in As
The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed.
o Change Location
Change the regional settings for the signed in HEOS Account.
o Change Password
Change the password for the signed in HEOS Account.
o Delete Account
Delete the signed in HEOS Account.
o Sign Out
Sign out from the HEOS Account.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
258
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
General
Make various other settings.
Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Français / Español (Default: English)
0 "Language" can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings. 1. Press and hold the main unit's STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time for at least 3 seconds. "zVideo Format <NTSC>" appears on the display. 2. Press i on the main unit twice. "zGUI Language <ENGLISH>" appears on the display. 3. Use the main unit's o or p and set the language. 4. Press the main unit's ENTER to complete the setting.
ECO
Configure the ECO Mode and auto standby mode settings.
o ECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption and heat generation of this unit when power on. This is done by reducing the power supply line to the power amplifier, in turn the maximum power output.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
259
Remote
Index
Contents On:
Auto (Default):
Off:
Connections
Playback
Power savings are always active, regardless of volume or input signal.
Gives you the best balance between power savings and maximum power output:
For low volume levels, the power savings are active. If you increase the volume level, the power savings are switched off automatically, so you can enjoy maximum output power without distortion.
If the volume is set to a high level but no input signal is detected for more than 2 minutes, this unit will enable power savings. When an input signal is detected again or the input source is changed, this unit will automatically turn off power savings again at high volume levels.
No power savings.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 When the unit is switching between the different power saving states in "ECO Mode: Auto", you may notice a click noise from the inside of this unit, this is normal.
0 If content is paused for more than 2 minutes and playback is resumed from the same source at these high volume levels, there may be short delay before maximum power is restored.
0 "ECO Mode" can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
260
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Power On Default
Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.
Last (Default): On:
Auto:
Off:
The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "On".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Auto".
When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in "Off".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o On Screen Display
Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.
Always On:
Auto (Default): Off:
Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.
Do not display the meter.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
261
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Auto Standby
Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
n MAIN ZONE
Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit. Before the unit enters standby mode, "Auto Standby" is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen.
60 min: 30 min: 15 min: Off (Default):
The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes. The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes. The unit does not go into standby automatically.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n ZONE2 / ZONE3
When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.
8 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state after about 8 hours.
4 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 4 hours.
2 hours:
Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 2 hours.
Off (Default):
Does not automatically switch ZONE2/ ZONE3 to the standby state.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
262
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Bluetooth Transmitter
Sets this unit's Bluetooth transmitter.
Set to use Bluetooth headphones to listen to audio playing in the MAIN ZONE.
o Transmitter
Enables or disables the Bluetooth transmitter.
Off (Default):
On:
Disables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.
Enables the Bluetooth transmitter feature.
o Output Mode
Selects the audio output method.
Bluetooth + Speakers (Default):
Bluetooth Only:
Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones and main zone speakers.
Audio is output to Bluetooth headphones only.
o Connected device
Displays the Bluetooth device connected to this unit.
o Device List
Available devices are displayed in the list once you start pairing mode on the Bluetooth headphones you want to connect. Select your Bluetooth headphones from the list to pair them. This unit can only pair with one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. Switch between registered devices from Device List in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" setup menu. To remove a saved Bluetooth device from the list, use the ui buttons to select it, then press the OPTION button and select "Forget This Device".
0 "Output Mode" can also be set from "Bluetooth Transmitter" in the option menu. 0 A2DP profile-compatible Bluetooth speakers can be connected following the same
steps used to connect Bluetooth headphones.
NOTE 0 Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth receiver function cannot be used at the same
time. Settings in this menu are not available when listening to music on a Bluetooth device in any zone. 0 Even when "Transmitter" is set to "On", press Bluetooth on the remote control to select the "Bluetooth" source and enable the Bluetooth receiver function. To listen to music stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones on this unit, press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then reconnect the Bluetooth device. 0 Menu settings for Bluetooth Transmitter are not available when this unit is grouped within the HEOS App.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
263
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0 Values set for "Volume Limit" and "Power On Volume" are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume "Scale". (v p. 192)
o Bass
Adjust bass. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)
o Treble
Adjust treble. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)
o High Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On:
Off (Default):
The low range is attenuated. The low range is not attenuated.
o Lch Level
Adjust the left channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o Rch Level
Adjust the right channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
o Channel
Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.
Stereo (Default):
Mono:
Stereo playback. Monaural playback.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
264
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)
Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
Through (Default):
PCM:
The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the device in ZONE2.
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT connectors or speaker terminals.
o Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable (Default):
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB):
Volume can be adjusted.
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.
0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB". (v p. 192)
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 80 (20 dB 0 dB) (Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off:
Do not set a maximum volume.
0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 265) 0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB".
(v p. 192)
o Power On Volume
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last (Default):
Mute:
1 98 (79 dB 18 dB):
Use the memorized setting from the last session. Always mute when power is turned on.
The volume is adjusted to the set level.
0 This can be set when "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". (v p. 265)
0 The dB value is displayed when the "Scale" setting is " 79.5 dB 18.0 dB". (v p. 192)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
265
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Mute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full (Default):
-40 dB :
-20 dB :
The sound is muted entirely.
The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults:
The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.
0 Up to 10 characters can be input.
Quick Select Names
Change the quick select name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer.
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4
Set Defaults:
The default setting is restored for the edited quick select name.
0 Up to 16 characters can be input.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
266
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out. For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see "TRIGGER OUT jacks" (v p. 88).
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to "On".
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to "On" is selected.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to "On" is selected.
On: :
Activate trigger on this mode. Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Front Display
Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
o Dimmer
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Bright (Default): Dim: Dark: Off:
Normal display brightness.
Reduced display brightness. Very low display brightness. Turns the display off.
0 You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
267
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Channel Indicators
Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for the channel indication on the display.
Input:
Output (Default):
Uses the input signal display for the channel indication on the display.
Uses the output signal display for the channel indication on the display.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Firmware
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for upgrades.
o Check for Update
Check for firmware updates. The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.
Update Now: Update Later:
Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.
Update later.
0 This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cannot be performed, an "Update Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on update error messages. (v p. 306) Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.
0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
268
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Auto-Update
Turns on Automatic Updates so that futures updates are automatically downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.
n Auto-Update
This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in standby mode.
On:
Off (Default):
Turns on Automatic Updates. Turns off Automatic Updates.
n Time Zone
Change the time zone. Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.
0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Allow Update
Enable or disable updates and upgrades for this unit.
On (Default):
Off:
Enables this unit to receive updates and upgrades.
Prevents this unit from receiving update and upgrade.
0 This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.
o Upgrade Notification
When the latest Upgrade firmware is available, a notification message is displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the power is turned on.
On (Default):
Off:
Display upgrade message. Do not display upgrade message.
0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
269
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Add New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade.
Upgrade Package: Upgrade Status:
Upgrade:
Display the items to be upgraded.
Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.
Execute the upgrade process. When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed.
0 Information regarding the "Update" function and "Add New Feature" will be announced on the Denon website each time related plans are defined. See the Denon website for details about upgrades.
0 When the procedure is complete, "Registered" is displayed in this menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, "Not Registered" is displayed. The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure. The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit's u and INFO for at least 3 seconds.
0 If the upgrade is not successful, "Upgrade Error" message appears in the display. See "Troubleshooting" "Update/upgrade error messages" for information on upgrade error messages. (v p. 306) Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade again.
0 This menu cannot be selected when "Allow Update" is set to "Off".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Notes concerning use of "Update" and "Add New Feature"
0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 85)
0 Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
0 Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.
0 If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After about 1 minute, "Please wait" appears on the display and update restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
270
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Information
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
o Audio
Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
Sound Mode: Input Signal: Format: Sample Rate: Offset:
Flag:
The currently set sound mode.
The input signal type.
The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround, LFE).
The input signal's sampling frequency.
The dialogue normalization correction value.
This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. "MATRIX" is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, "DISCRETE" with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Video
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for MAIN ZONE. HDMI Signal Info. Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth / ALLM / QMS / QFT
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2 Interface / HDR / Resolutions / Enhanced Features
0 A or B may be displayed at the end of "Resolution". A represents "Uncompressed Video" and B represents "Compressed Video".
o ZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE: ZONE2/3:
This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
This item shows information about settings for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
271
Remote
Index
Contents
o Firmware
Version: DTS Version:
Connections
Playback
Displays information for the current firmware.
Displays the current DTS version.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Notifications
Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on.
Notification Alerts
On (Default):
Off:
Notification messages are displayed. Notification messages are not displayed.
0 Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.
SOURCE Blu-ray SOUND Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD SIGNAL Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD AUDYSSEY MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic EQ : On Dynamic Volume : Medium
INPUT SIGNAL
FHL LFE
EXT FHR
FWL FL C FR FWR
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
ACTIVE SPEAKERS
SW
FL C FR
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
50.0
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
272
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes:
Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No:
Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.
Save & Load
Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.
0 Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.
0 It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until the process is complete.
o Save Configuration
Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device. When the settings are saved correctly, "Saved" appears on the display and the file "config.avr" is created on the USB memory device.
0 Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.
o Load Configuration
Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored. When the saved settings are restored correctly, "Loaded" appears on the display and the unit automatically restarts.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
273
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
o Lock
On:
Off (Default):
Turn protection on. Turn protection off.
0 When cancelling the setting, set "Lock" to "Off".
NOTE 0 When "Lock" is set to "On", no setting items are displayed except for "Setup
Lock".
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Reset
Returns settings to the factory default. Initialization can be performed for all unit settings or for Network settings only.
o All Settings
All settings are reset to the factory default values.
o Network Settings
Only network settings are reset to the factory default values.
0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 273)
0 The "Reset" operation can also be performed by using the button on the main unit. For details on resetting all of the settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting factory settings" (v p. 307), and for details on resetting the network settings to the factory defaults see "Resetting network settings" (v p. 308).
NOTE
0 Do not disconnect the power or turn the device off during network settings initialization.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
274
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Operating external devices with the remote control unit
Z2 Z3 Operation mode indicators
Input source select buttons
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME 8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PLAYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
MAIN
DEVICE MENU
QUICK SELECT 1 4
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players or TVs made by different manufacturers.
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
OPTION SETUP
0 - 9
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
D EF SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
275
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Registering preset codes
There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for registering preset codes of Denon players, and the method for registering the preset numbers of other manufacturers' devices. 0 "Registering Denon players" (v p. 276) 0 "Registering by entering preset numbers" (v p. 277)
o Registering Denon players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of Denon Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.
n Registering Blu-ray Disc players
1 Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n Registering DVD players
1 Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
n Registering CD players
1 Press and hold down CD and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
276
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
n Registering multiple players at the same time
1 Press and hold down QUICK SELECT 1 4 and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
Devices to be registered at the same time
Blu-ray Disc DVD player CD player player
Press and hold down the buttons
P
P
QUICK SELECT 1 and OPTION
P
P
QUICK SELECT 2 and OPTION
P
P
QUICK SELECT 3 and OPTION
P
P
P
QUICK SELECT 4 and OPTION
NOTE
0 Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may not operate. In this case, try "Registering by entering preset numbers" (v p. 277).
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Registering by entering preset numbers
The following table shows the device groups that can be registered for each of the input source select buttons. Check the preset number of the device you want to register beforehand in the "Remote Control Preset Codes" file. http://manuals.denon.com/AVRX4700H/preset/ AVRX4700HPresetCodes.pdf
Button
Device groups that can be registered
CBL/SAT group
VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group
CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group, Audio group
CBL/SAT group
VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group
AUX
CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group,
BD/DVD group, Audio group
8K
CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group,
BD/DVD group, Audio group
Audio group
TV group
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
277
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
1 Press and hold down the input source button that you want to register the preset code to and SETUP until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators are flashing green.
2 Enter the preset number (5 digits) listed for the device in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 9) on the remote control.
0 Some manufacturers use more than one type of preset code. Preset codes to change the number and verify correct operation.
NOTE 0 Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons
may not operate.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
278
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.
0 The "DEV." indicator lights when an external device is being operated. 0 The "TV" indicator lights when the TV is being operated. 0 To operate the menu of this unit, press MAIN before operating the unit. The "AVR"
operation mode indicator lights when the unit is being operated.
n CBL/SAT group (Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/ Media player/IP TV) operation
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME
8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PLAYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
Operation buttons DEVICE X DEVICE MENU CH/PAGE df INFO OPTION u i o p ENTER(Cursor) BACK SETUP 8 9 1 6 7 3 2 0 9, +10 ENTER(Number)
Function Power on/off Menu Switch channels (up/down) Information Sub menu, Option Cursor operation Enter Back Home menu Skip chapter Playback Fast-reverse / Fast-forward Pause Stop Channel selection 3 digit entry
0 Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE X buttons.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
279
Remote
Index
Contents
n TV group (TV) operation
Connections
Playback
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME MEDIA PL AYER
1
8K PHONO USB
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH / PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
Operation buttons TV X TV INPUT TV MENU CH/PAGE df INFO OPTION u i o p ENTER(Cursor) BACK SETUP 8 9 1 6 7 3 2 0 9, +10 ENTER(Number)
Function TV power on/off Switch TV input TV menu Switch channels (up/down) Information Sub menu, Option Cursor operation Enter Back Setup Skip chapter Playback Fast-reverse / Fast-forward Pause Stop Channel selection 3 digit entry
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n VCR/PVR group (Video cassette recorder (VCR)/personal video recorder (PVR)) operation
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME
8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PLAYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
Operation buttons DEVICE X DEVICE MENU CH/PAGE df INFO OPTION u i o p ENTER BACK SETUP 8 9 1 6 7 3 2
0 9, +10
Function Power on/off Menu Switch channels (up/down) Information Sub menu, Option Cursor operation Enter Back Setup Skip chapter Playback Fast-reverse / Fast-forward Pause Stop Select title, chapter or channel selection
0 Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE X and TV X buttons. 0 TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without pressing the TV button.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
280
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
n BD/DVD group (Blu-ray Disc player/HD-DVD player/DVD player/DVD recorder) operation
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME
8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PL AYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
Operation buttons DEVICE X DEVICE MENU CH/PAGE df INFO OPTION u i o p ENTER BACK SETUP 8 9 1 6 7 3 2
0 9, +10
Function Power on/off (Popup) Menu Switch channels (up/down) Information Top menu Cursor operation Enter Back Setup Skip chapter Playback Fast-reverse / Fast-forward Pause Stop Select title, chapter or channel selection
Settings
Tips
Appendix
n Audio group (CD player/CD recorder) operation
AVR CONTROL
Z2
Z 3
MAIN
POWER
DEV.
TV
AVR
DEVICE MENU
TV MENU
CBL / SAT
DVD
INPUT
TV AUDIO
Blu-ray AUX TUNER Bluetooth
GAME
8K PHONO USB
MEDIA PLAYER
1
CD
QUICK SELECT
2
3
ECO
INTERNET RADIO
4
CH /PAGE
MUTE
VOLUME
INFO
BACK TUNE
OPTION ENTER
SETUP TUNE
Operation buttons DEVICE X INFO u i o p ENTER 8 9 1 6 7 3 2 0 9, +10
Function Power on/off Information Cursor operation Enter Skip track Playback Fast-reverse / Fast-forward Pause Stop Track selection
MOVIE
SOUND MODE MUSIC GAME
PURE
ABC
DEF
SLEEP
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7
8
9
+10
0
ENTER
RC-1240
0 Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation. (Depending on the device, some Denon models can only be operated with the power turned on.)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
281
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Initializing registered preset codes
1 Press and hold down MAIN and OPTION until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
Specifying the operating zone with the remote control
To prevent accidental misuse, you can set the zone for which the remote control unit is used.
1 Press and hold down either MAIN, Z2 or Z3 and SETUP at the same time until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators flash green.
MAIN:
Z2:
Z3 (Default):
When only using MAIN ZONE
When using MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
When using MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3
Resetting the remote control unit
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
1 Press and hold down DEVICE MENU until the DEV., TV and AVR indicators on the remote are flashing green, then release.
2 Press 9, 8 and 1, in that order. The DEV., TV and AVR indicators flash twice. All the settings are restored to their defaults.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
282
Remote
Index
Contents
o Contents
Connections
Playback
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
284
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power
on
284
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
284
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
284
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume
level
284
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies
284
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a
new one
285
I want to combine a desired video with the current music
285
I want to skip unused input sources
285
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 285
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a
game on my game console
285
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control
285
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
287
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
288
Display on this unit shows nothing
288
No sound comes out
289
Desired sound does not come out
290
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
293
No video is shown on the TV
294
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
296
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on
the television is different from normal
296
AirPlay cannot be played back
297
USB memory devices cannot be played back
298
Bluetooth cannot be played back
299
The Internet radio cannot be played back
301
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
302
Various online services cannot be played
303
The HDMI Control function does not work
303
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
304
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 305
Update/upgrade error messages
306
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
283
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 0 Set the volume upper limit for "Volume Limit" in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 192), "Volume Limit" (v p. 265))
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for "Power On Volume" in the menu. You can set this for each zone. ("Volume" (v p. 192), "Power On Volume" (v p. 265))
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When "Subwoofer Mode" in the menu is set to "LFE+Main", you
can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 246)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 0 Use "Center Level Adjust" in the menu to adjust the level. (v p. 182)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 0 Set "Dynamic EQ" in the menu to "On". This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 194)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 0 Set "Dynamic Volume" in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 195)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
284
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 0 Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 219)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 0 Set "Video Select" in the option menu to "On". You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 137)
I want to skip unused input sources 0 Set unused input sources for "Hide Sources" in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on
this unit. (v p. 217)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 0 Set "All Zone Stereo" in the option menu to "Start". You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in
MAIN ZONE. (v p. 139)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I'm playing a game on my game console 0 When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set "Video Mode" in the menu to "Game". (v p. 206)
I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 0 Select "AV Receiver" in a TV menu such as "Input"z or "Operate Connected HDMI Device"z. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This
Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV. z The selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
285
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following: 1. Are the connections correct? 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual? 3. Are the other devices operating properly?
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem. Continue pressing the X button on the unit until "Restart" appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section. If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
286
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off
Power does not turn on. 0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (v p. 89)
Power automatically turns off. 0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (v p. 159) 0 "Auto Standby" is set. "Auto Standby" is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable "Auto Standby", set "Auto Standby" on
the menu to "Off". (v p. 262)
Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds. 0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down
sufficiently, and then turn the power on again. (v p. 328) 0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.
Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds. 0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a
core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire. (v p. 40) 0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. (v p. 91) 0 This unit's amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center.
The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. "ZONE2 On" or "ZONE3 On" appears on the display. 0 Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on
the main unit or press the POWER X button after pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
287
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit. 0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (v p. 9) 0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°. (v p. 9) 0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. 0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. (v p. 9) 0 The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the
remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light. 0 The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press MAIN, Z2 or Z3 to select the zone to
operate. (v p. 181) 0 The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating mode to AVR. (v p. 279) 0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV
and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
Display on this unit shows nothing
Display is off. 0 Set "Dimmer" on the menu to something other than "Off". (v p. 267) 0 When the sound mode is set to "Pure Direct", the display is off. (v p. 144)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
288
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
No sound comes out
No sound comes out of speakers. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 40) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. (v p. 40) 0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. (v p. 40) 0 Check that a proper input source is selected. (v p. 91) 0 Adjust the volume. (v p. 92) 0 Cancel the mute mode. (v p. 92) 0 Check the digital audio input connector setting. (v p. 214) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default. 0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector. 0 Audio is output to your Bluetooth headphones, but not to speakers or pre-outs when "Output Mode" set to "Bluetooth Only". Change "Output Mode" to
"Bluetooth + Speakers" to output audio from your Bluetooth headphones as well as your speakers or pre-outs. (v p. 263)
No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection.
0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
289
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Desired sound does not come out
The volume does not increase. 0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using "Limit" on the menu. (v p. 192) 0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
The volume of Bluetooth headphones does not decrease. 0 Bluetooth headphones volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. Use a Bluetooth headphones with volume adjustment.
No sound comes out with the HDMI connection. 0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (v p. 73) 0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set "HDMI Audio Out" on the menu to "AVR". To output from the TV, set "TV". (v p. 200) 0 When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (v p. 156)
When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit 0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this
setting exists on your television. For more information, check your television's owner's manual. 0 Make sure the input source of this unit is "TV Audio". 0 The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the "TV Audio" input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove
the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television. (v p. 215)
No sound comes out of a specific speaker. 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 0 Check that a selection other than "None" is set for the "Speaker Config." setting in menu. (v p. 238) 0 Check the "Assign Mode" setting in the menu. (v p. 230) 0 When the sound mode is "Stereo" and "Virtual", audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer. 0 Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if "Speaker Virtualizer" is set to "On" when "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "1 spkr" in the
menu. (v p. 185) 0 When "Speaker Config." - "Surr. Back" is set to "2 spkrs", "Speaker Config." - "Center" is set to "Large" or "Small", and sound mode is set to "IMAX
DTS", surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. (v p. 239)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
290
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
No sound is produced from subwoofer. 0 Check the subwoofer connections. 0 Turn on the subwoofer's power. 0 Set "Speaker Config." - "Subwoofer" in the menu to "1 spkr" or "2 spkrs". (v p. 238) 0 When "Speaker Config." - "Front" in the menu is set to "Large", depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the
subwoofer. (v p. 238) 0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (v p. 246) 0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the "Subwoofer Mode" to "LFE+Main". (v p. 246)
DTS sound is not output. 0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to "DTS".
Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output. 0 Make HDMI connections. (v p. 77) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, "PCM" is set by default.
DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected. 0 DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones.
Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected. 0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones.
IMAX DTS:X cannot be selected. 0 IMAX DTS:X and IMAX DTS cannot be selected but DTS:X and DTS can be selected, when the headphones are used.
Sound modes other than "Stereo" or "Direct" cannot be selected. 0 Only "Stereo" or "Direct" can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
291
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM cannot be selected.
0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. (v p. 219) 0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (v p. 143) 0 Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM cannot be selected when sound mode is "DTS Virtual:X" or sound mode
that have "+ Virtual:X" in the sound mode name. 0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones.
"Restorer" cannot be selected.
0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, "Restorer" cannot be used. (v p. 190)
0 Switch to a sound mode other than "Direct" or "Pure Direct". (v p. 143)
No audio is output from PRE OUT or speakers for ZONE2/ZONE3.
0 In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format. 0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2
irrespective of the input signal format, set "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to "PCM (2ch)" on the played back device. (v p. 265) 0 When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 98.4 ft/30 m.
Sound mode settings are not available when using Bluetooth headphones. Audio menu settings are also not available.
0 This unit cannot change sound mode or audio menu settings for audio output to Bluetooth headphones.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
292
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs
During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted.
0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. 0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy.
When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit.
0 When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit.
Noise often occurs in FM/AM broadcasting. 0 Change the antenna orientation or position. (v p. 83) 0 Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. 0 Use an outdoor antenna. (v p. 83) 0 Separate the antenna from other connection cables. (v p. 83)
The sounds appear to be distorted. 0 Lower the volume. (v p. 92) 0 Set "Off" to the "ECO Mode". When "On" or "Auto" is in the "ECO Mode", the audio may by distorted when the playback volume is high. (v p. 259)
Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection.
0 The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the following methods. (v p. 85) - Install devices that cause interference away from this unit. - Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference. - Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.) - Switch to a wired LAN connection.
0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection. (v p. 252)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
293
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
No video is shown on the TV
No picture appears. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 73) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (v p. 214) 0 Check that the proper input source is selected. (v p. 91) 0 Check the video input connector setting. (v p. 214) 0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (v p. 271) 0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output
correctly. (v p. 312) 0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3. 0 The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. (v p. 313) 0 To play back a 4K video, use a "High Speed HDMI Cable" or an "High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet". In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K
videos, it is recommended to use a "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables" or an "Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet" that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package. 0 Use an "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video.
No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection.
0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP). (v p. 312)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
294
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
No video from an input source such as a game console is shown on the TV.
0 When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the Video Conversion function may not function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.
While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV.
0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals. - Some images of 3D video contents - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - 4K or 8K video - Some kind of HDR signals - Some kind of game contents - Compressed video
When using HDMI ZONE2, the video output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted.
0 When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
295
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV
The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV. 0 The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is connected to a TV using a different video output
connector, operate while watching the display on this unit. 0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.
- Some images of 3D video content - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - Some kind of HDR signals - Some kind of game contents - Compressed video 0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (v p. 272) 0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode. (v p. 142) 0 Set the "TV Format" setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. (v p. 213)
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal
The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different. 0 Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations
content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
296
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
AirPlay cannot be played back
The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (v p. 85) 0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version.
Audio is not output. 0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the
volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level. 0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this
unit. (v p. 129)
Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay. 0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance
from the wireless LAN access point.
iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit. 0 Enable the "Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers" setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through
the remote control unit.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
297
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
USB memory devices cannot be played back
USB memory device is not recognized. 0 Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (v p. 82) 0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. 0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port. 0 The USB memory device must be formatted to "FAT32" or "NTFS". 0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive
compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
Files on the USB memory device are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 93) 0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the
folder structure of the USB memory device. 0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed.
iOS and Android devices are not recognized. 0 The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices.
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. 0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (v p. 315) 0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
298
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Bluetooth cannot be played back
Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit.
0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner's Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. 0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again.
Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected.
0 Smartphones and other Bluetooth devices cannot be connected when "Transmitter" is set to "On". Press Bluetooth on the remote control to switch the input source to Bluetooth, then connect the device. (v p. 263)
Cannot connect Bluetooth headphones.
0 Bring the Bluetooth headphones near to this unit. 0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth headphones off and on again, and then try again. 0 Go to "General" - "Bluetooth Transmitter", and set "Transmitter" to "On" within the menu. (v p. 263) 0 Make sure this unit is not already connected to another pair of Bluetooth headphones. Check the currently connected Bluetooth headphones by
pressing INFO on the remote control or STATUS button on the unit. Disconnect the connected Bluetooth headphones before connecting the ones you want to use. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if Bluetooth is being used as an input source in any zone. 0 Bluetooth headphones cannot be connected if this unit is grouped in the HEOS App. Remove this unit from the group to enable Bluetooth headphones connection. 0 The Bluetooth headphones cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. 0 Connection and operation are not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled devices. 0 This unit can only connect to one Bluetooth headphone at a time. However, up to 8 Bluetooth headphones can be registered. You can switch between registered devices from "Device List" in the "Bluetooth Transmitter" menu. (v p. 263)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
299
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
The sound is cut off. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. 0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices. 0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device.
The sound is cut off or noise occurs when using Bluetooth headphones. 0 Move the Bluetooth headphones closer to this unit. 0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth headphones and this unit. 0 Reconnect the Bluetooth headphones. 0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices. 0 We recommend using wired LAN to connect this unit and other devices. 0 Bluetooth transmits on the 2.4 GHz band which may interfere with Wi-Fi transmitted on this band. Connect this unit and other devices to Wi-Fi network
on a 5 GHz band if available on your Wi-Fi router.
Audio is delayed on my Bluetooth headphones. 0 This unit cannot adjust audio delay on Buetooth headphones.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
300
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
The Internet radio cannot be played back
A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed. 0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (v p. 85) 0 Perform the network diagnostic mode.
Internet Radio cannot be played. 0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and
AAC. (v p. 318) 0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. 0 The IP address is not properly set. (v p. 254) 0 Check the power of the router is on. 0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to "On" on this unit. (v p. 254) 0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (v p. 254) 0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or
select another radio station. (v p. 114) 0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service.
Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. 0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
301
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Files stored on a computer cannot be played. 0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (v p. 317) 0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer. 0 Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owner's manual of the
server or NAS.
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server. 0 The computer's or router's firewall is activated. Check the computer's or router's firewall settings. 0 Computer's power is not turned on. Turn on the power. 0 Server is not running. Launch the server. 0 IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (v p. 251)
Music files on PC cannot be played back. 0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (v p. 85)
Files on PC or NAS are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 317)
Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. 0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting. 0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player's media sharing function and add
NAS to the selected play folder. 0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
302
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Various online services cannot be played
Various online services cannot be played. 0 The online service may have been discontinued.
The HDMI Control function does not work
The HDMI Control function does not work. 0 Check that "HDMI Control" in the menu is set to "On". (v p. 202) 0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the
HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (v p. 156) 0 Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (v p. 156) 0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this
unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (v p. 156) 0 The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. Use the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.
(v p. 73)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
303
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Cannot connect to the network. 0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting
details of this unit. (v p. 253) 0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the
unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points. 0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. 0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN).
Cannot connect to a WPS Router. 0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. 0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the "Connect" button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes. 0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to "None", "WPA-PSK (AES)" or WPA2-PSK (AES).
(v p. 253) 0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this case, use the "Scan
Networks" or "Manual" method to connect.
Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. 0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. 0 When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
304
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
When using MAIN ZONE, video output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2. 0 With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
When using HDMI ZONE2, no video or audio is output from the TV in ZONE2. 0 Check that the power is on for ZONE2. (v p. 175) 0 Check the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 175) 0 The AUX-HDMI and HDMI 7 connector does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function. 0 In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. 0 When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to "PCM" on the playback device. Alternatively, set
"ZONE2 Setup" - "HDMI Audio" in the menu to "PCM". (v p. 265) 0 When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution
that is compatible with the TV.
When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN ZONE audio is played back as PCM. 0 When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
305
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Update/upgrade error messages
If an update/upgrade is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.
Display
Description
Connection failed. Please check your network, then try The network connection is unstable.
again.
Connection to the server failed.
Check your network environment and try the update again.
Update failed. Please check your network, then try again.
The download of the firmware failed. Check your network environment and try the update again.
Upgrade failed. Please check your network, then try again.
The download of the firmware failed. Check your network environment and try the upgrade again.
Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the power cord, and try again.
The update failed. Press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. The update restarts automatically.
Please contact customer service in your area.
This unit may be broken. Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
306
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Resetting factory settings
If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 286)
If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
INFO
1 Turn off the power using X.
2 Press X while simultaneously pressing INFO and BACK.
3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Initialized" appears on the display.
X
.
BACK
0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 273)
0 You can also reset all settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" - "All Settings" in the menu. (v p. 274)
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
307
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Resetting network settings
If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 286) If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below. Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again. However, the menu "Amp Assign", "Speaker Config." and "Video" settings are not reset.
SOURCE SELECT DIMMER
1 Press X to turn on power to the unit. 2 Turn SOURCE SELECT to select "HEOS Music". 3 Press and hold the main unit's DIMMER and p at the
same time for at least 3 seconds.
4 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when "Network Reset..." appears on the display.
X
p
.
5 "Completed" is shown in the display when reset is complete.
0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the "Save & Load" function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 273)
0 You can also reset the network settings to the factory defaults using "Reset" "Network Settings" in the menu. (v p. 274)
NOTE 0 Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
308
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0 Deep Color An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0 x.v.Color This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. "x.v.Color" is trademark of Sony Corporation.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 3D This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
0 4K / 8K This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) and 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels) video signals of HDMI.
0 Content Type It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).
0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0 sYCC601 color Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.
0 ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) This unit automatically switches to low latency mode depending on playback contents when using a combination of television and game console compatible with the ALLM function.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
309
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 Auto Lip Sync This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video. Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0 HDMI Pass Through Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.
0 HDMI Control If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other. 0 Power off link This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step. 0 Audio output destination switching From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier. 0 Volume adjustment You can adjust this unit's volume in the TV volume adjustment operation. 0 Input source switching You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching. When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
0 ARC (Audio Return Channel) This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI Control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.
0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higherquality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
310
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
0 VRR (Variable Refresh Rate): VRR reduces or eliminates lag, stutter and frame tearing for more fluid and better detailed gameplay.
0 QMS (Quick Media Switching): QMS for movies and video eliminates the delay that can result in blank screens before content is displayed.
0 QFT (Quick Frame Transport): QFT reduces latency for smoother no-lag gaming, and real-time interactive virtual reality.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Supported audio formats
2-channel Linear 2-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit PCM
Multi-channel Linear PCM
7.1-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Bitstream
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express
DSD
2-channel 5.1-channel, 2.8 MHz
o Supported video signals
0 480i 0 576i 0 720p 60/50Hz 0 1080p 60/50/24Hz 0 8K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz
0 480p 0 576p 0 1080i 60/50Hz 0 4K 120/100/60/50/30/25/24 Hz
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
311
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the owner's manual of your television or player for more information.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
312
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.
Video device
This unit
HDMI-compatible TV
Appendix
Output
HDMI signal
Input (IN)
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
Component video signal
Component video
connectors Video signal
Component video connectors
Video connector
Video connector
Output (MONITOR OUT)
HDMI signal
HDMI connector
HDMI connector
HDMI-incompatible TV
Component video signal
Component video
Component video
connectors
connectors
Video signal
Video connector
Video connector
0 The MAIN ZONE Video Conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
0 When component video signals are used, only 480i and 576i signals are converted to HDMI signals.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
313
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for "Resolution" in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 207)
.
Output signal
Input signal
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p
1080i
HDMI
Component video Video
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 30/25/24Hz 1080p 60/50Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz 4K 120/100Hz 8K 30/25/24Hz 8K 60/50Hz 480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/576i
z1 The HDMI connector on the front panel supports YCbCr 4:2:0 format only. z2 Only supported by the HDMI 7 connector.
1080p 30/25/24Hz
HDMI
1080p 60/50Hz
4K 30/25/24Hz
4K 60/50Hz
4K
8K
120/100Hz 30/25/24Hz
8K 60/50Hz
z1 z2 z2 z2
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
314
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing back a USB memory devices
0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not
be played back properly.
o Compatible formats
WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1 FLAC
Apple Losslessz2 DSD
Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2.8/5.6 MHz
Channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
2-channel 2-channel
Bit rate 48 192 kbps 32 320 kbps
48 - 320 kbps
Extension .wma .mp3 .wav
.aac/.m4a .flac
.m4a .dsf/.dff
z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit. Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.
z2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
315
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
o Maximum number of playable files and folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.
Item
Media USB memory device
Number of folder directory levels z1
8 levels
Number of folders
500
Number of filesz2
5000
z1 The limited number includes the root folder. z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile. 0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality. 0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
o About Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions. 0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated 0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
316
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then
music may not be played back properly. 0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.
o Specifications of supported files
WMAz1 MP3 WAV MPEG-4 AACz1 FLAC
Apple Losslessz2 DSD
Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz 2.8/5.6 MHz
Channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
2-channel 2-channel
Bit rate 48 192 kbps 32 320 kbps
48 - 320 kbps
Extension .wma .mp3 .wav
.aac/.m4a .flac
.m4a .dsf/.dff
z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit. Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.
z2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
317
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Playing back Internet Radio
o Playable broadcast station specifications
WMA MP3 MPEG-4 AAC
Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz 32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate 48 192
kbps 32 320
kbps 48 - 320
kbps
Extension .wma
.mp3 .aac/ .m4a
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.
0 "Surround Parameter" settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
318
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Explanation of terms
o Audyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey LFCTM (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFCTM solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFCTM dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
319
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Auro-3D
Auro-3D® The Auro-3D® technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D® is the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs.
Auro-Matic® Auro-Matic® up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or 2D listening experience.
o Dolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
320
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequency effects. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a "three-dimensional" feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ inceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround playback.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
321
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Speaker Virtualizer
Dolby Atmos height virtualization is a digital signal processing solution that leverages Dolby's deep understanding of human audio perception to create the sensation of overhead sound from the listener-level speakers. This signal processing applies height-cue filters to overhead audio components contained within the audio signal before they are mixed into the listener-level speakers. These filters simulate the natural spectral cues imparted by our ears to sounds that originate from overhead. For stereo and 3.1-channel speaker configuration, Dolby Atmos height virtualization is combined with surround virtualization to create an enveloping 360-degree audio minus the speakers that would ordinarily be employed behind or to the side of the listener.
o DTS
Dialog Control Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control.
DTS This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the world's finest movie theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround DTSTM Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
322
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1
DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1
DTS-ESTM Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS:X
DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
323
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
DTS Neural:X Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system.
DTS Virtual:X DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of room size, layout, or speaker configuration.
IMAX® IMAX® is well admired around the world for a premium large format movie experience. IMAX delivers the most advanced movie projection technology combined with rich, deep sound
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Audio
Apple Lossless Audio Codec
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data.
Bass Sync
Audio sources such as BD and DVD inherently have time delay between the bass components of the satellite channel and the LFE channel. This function adjusts such a delay for reproducing (replaying) richer bass sound during playback. This function is by default set to 0 msec. Since the delay varies according to the title, play back the audio source and adjust to the most effective value for playback. For some audio sources that are played back, this function may have little effect.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
324
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality. The FLAC license is as shown below. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the "MPEG-1" video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
325
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include "MPEG-1 Video", "MPEG-2 Video", "MPEG-4 Visual", "MPEG-4 AVC". Audio standards include "MPEG-1 Audio", "MPEG-2 Audio", "MPEG-4 AAC".
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player. To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal). The number of readings taken in one second is called the "sampling frequency". The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.
Speaker impedance This is an AC resistance value, indicated in (ohms). Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialogue normalization function This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.
Dynamic range The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the system's configuration.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
326
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Video
ISF ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the optimization of device video performance.
Progressive (sequential scanning) This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.
o Network
AirPlay AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
WEP Key (network key) This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi® Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
327
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.
Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on "SSID (network names)". For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the "SSID" and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Others
HDCP When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
Pairing Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring. When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
Protection circuit This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
328
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Trademark information
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
.
Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The trademark "iPhone" is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K. Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey LaboratoriesTM. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFCTM are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
.
Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies. Auro-3D® and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by copyright law and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content. Auro Technologies: mail info@auro-technologies.com, phone +32-(0)-14314343, fax +32-(0)-14321224, www.auro-technologies.com
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
329
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, the DTS:X logo, Virtual:X, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
.
The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
HDR10+TM logo is a trademark of HDR10+ Technologies, LLC.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
330
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
.
Manufactured under license from IMAX Corporation. IMAX® is a registered trademark of IMAX Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All Rights Reserved. For DTS patents, see http:// patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
331
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Specifications
o Audio section
0 Power amplifier Rated output:
Dynamic power: Output connectors:
Front: 125 W + 125 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 165 W + 165 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Center: 125 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 165 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround: 125 W + 125 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 165 W + 165 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back / Height1 / Height2: 125 W + 125 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 165 W + 165 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) 130 W x 2-channel (8 /ohms) 190 W x 2-channel (4 /ohms) 4 16 /ohms
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
332
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
0 Analog Input sensitivity: Frequency response: S/N: Distortion: Rated output:
0 Digital D/A output:
Digital input: 0 Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: RIAA deviation: S/N: Distortion factor:
200 mV 10 Hz 100 kHz -- +1, 3 dB (Direct mode) 102 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) 0.005 % (20 Hz 20 kHz) (Direct mode) 1.2 V
Rated output -- 2 V (at 0 dB playback) Total harmonic distortion -- 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio -- 102 dB Dynamic range -- 100 dB Format -- Digital audio interface
2.5 mV ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) 74 dB (IHF-A) 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
333
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
o Video section
0 Standard video connectors Input/output level and impedance: Frequency response:
0 Color component video connector Input/output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
o Tuner section
Reception frequency range: Effective sensitivity: 50 dB sensitivity: S/N ratio:
Distortion:
1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz -- 0, 3 dB
Y signal -- 1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PB / CB signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PR / CR signal -- 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms 5 Hz 60 MHz -- 0, 3 dB
[FM]
(Note: V at 75 /ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 15 W) 87.5 MHz 107.9 MHz 1.2 V (12.8 dBf) MONO 2.8 V (20.2 dBf) MONO 70 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) STEREO 67 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) MONO 0.7 % (1 kHz) STEREO 1.0 % (1 kHz)
Tips
[AM] 520 kHz 1710 kHz 18 V
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
334
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
o Wireless LAN section
Network type (wireless LAN standard): Security:
Used frequency range:
Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (Wi-Fi® compliant) z1 WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES) WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP) 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
z1 The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
335
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
o Bluetooth section
Communications system: Transmission power: Maximum communication range: Used frequency range: Modulation scheme: Supported profiles:
Corresponding codec: Transmission range (A2DP):
Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2 Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1 Approx. 98.4 ft/30 m in line of sight z2 2.4 GHz FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) Receiver function A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2 AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5 Transmitter function A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2 SBC 20 Hz 20,000 Hz
z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
o General
Operating temperature:
41 °F - 95 °F (5 °C - 35 °C)
Power supply:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption:
710 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W z
Power consumption in CEC standby mode:
0.5 W
z When "Network Control" in the menu is set to "Off In Standby" and "HDMI Pass Through" is set to "Off".
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
336
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
o Dimensions (Unit : in. (mm))
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
1.9 0.9 (47) (22)
(32)
1.3
9.3 (237) 15.5 (393)
15.3 (389)
13.3 (339)
1.3 2.2 (32) (55)
(18)
0.7
17.1 (434)
9.3 (236)
6.6 (167)
(19) 5.8 (148)
1.8 (45)
.
o Weight: 30.2 lb (13.7 kg)
Front panel
Display
13.5 (344)
0.8
2.4 (60)
1.8 (45)
Rear panel
337
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
Index
v Numerics 11.1-channel .................................................. 59 3D ................................................................ 309 4K/8K ........................................................... 309 5.1-channel .............................................. 37, 46 7.1-channel .............................................. 37, 47 9.1-channel .................................................... 51
v A AirPlay .......................................................... 128 All Zone Stereo ............................................ 139 Audio formats ....................... 311, 315, 317, 318 Audio settings ....................................... 177, 182 Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 319 Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 319 Audyssey LFCTM .......................................... 319 Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 319 Audyssey settings ................................ 193, 221 Audyssey Sub EQ HTTM ............................... 220 Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 219 Auto sound mode ......................................... 144 Auto Standby ............................................... 262
v B Bi-amp ............................................................ 65 Bluetooth device ............................................ 98 Blu-ray Disc player ................................... 78, 92
v C Cable TV ........................................................ 77
v D Direct sound mode ....................................... 149 Display ........................................................... 22 Dolby Atmos ................................................. 320 Dolby sound mode ............................... 145, 321 DTS sound mode ................................. 146, 322 DVD player ............................................... 78, 92
v E ECO Mode ................................................... 259 External control device ................................... 87
v F Firmware Update .......................................... 268 FM/AM antenna ...................................... 83, 106 Front panel ..................................................... 18
v G Game console ................................................ 80 General settings ................................... 180, 259
v H HDCP ........................................................... 312 HDMI Control ....................................... 156, 202 HEOS Account ..................................... 120, 258 HEOS Favorites ........................................... 133
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
338
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
Tips
Appendix
v I Input Assign ................................................. 214 Input settings ........................................ 178, 214 Input source ................................................... 91 Internet Radio ............................................... 113
v L Listening position ......................................... 219
v M Menu map .................................................... 177 Muting ............................................................ 92
v N NAS ............................................................. 115 Network settings .......................................... 251
v O Original sound mode .................................... 148
v P Pairing .................................................... 98, 100 PC ................................................................ 115 PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 148 Picture Mode ................................................ 198 Protection circuit .......................................... 328 Pure direct .................................................... 144
v Q Queue ............................................ 94, 116, 123 Quick select plus .......................................... 161
v R Rear panel ...................................................... 24 Remote control unit ........................................ 28 Resetting factory settings ............................. 307 Resetting network settings ........................... 308 Restorer ....................................................... 190
v S Satellite tuner ................................................. 77 Set-top box ..................................................... 77 Setup Assistant ............................................ 180 Sleep timer ................................................... 159 Sound mode ................................................. 142 Speaker connection ....................................... 40 Speaker settings .................................. 178, 219 Spotify .......................................................... 131 Stereo sound mode ...................................... 149
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
339
Remote
Index
Contents
Connections
Playback
Settings
v T Tips .............................................................. 284 Troubleshooting ........................................... 286 TV ....................................................... 73, 74, 75
v U USB memory device ................................ 82, 93
v V Video camcorder ............................................ 80 Video Conversion ................................. 206, 313 Video Select ................................................. 137 Video settings ....................................... 177, 198 Volume ................................................... 92, 135
v W Web control .................................................. 167 Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 252 Wired LAN .............................................. 85, 251 Wireless LAN ......................................... 86, 252
v Z ZONE2/ZONE3 ...................................... 67, 169
Tips
Appendix
Front panel
Display
Rear panel
340
Remote
Index
.
www.denon.com
341
3520 10742 00AD ©2020 Sound United. All Rights Reserved.
AVR-X4700H
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Quick Start Guide
Guide de démarrage rapide / Guía de inicio rápido
Read Me First....
Lisez-moi en premier.... / Lea esto primero....
Please do not return this unit to the store. If you need help...
Check our AVR setup tips online
Usa.denon.com/SetupTips Ca.Denon.com/SetupTips
Call for Assistance
1-855-MY.DENON (USA) 1-855-693-3666 1-800-668-0652 (Canada)
Monday Friday 10:00AM to 10:00PM E.S.T Saturday 12:00PM to 8:00PM E.S.T
ENGLISH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Denon AV receiver. This guide provides step-by-step instructions for setting up your AV receiver.
Before You Begin
Required for Setup
TV
Speaker cables
HDMI cable
Subwoofer cable
Optional
Speakers
LAN cable
or Wi-Fi router
· When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K, ARC and eARC functions, use a "High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet" that displays the HDMI logo.
· When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the 8K and 4K 120Hz video, use a "Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable" that displays the HDMI logo.
· These drawings are for illustrative purposes only and may not represent the actual product(s).
1
What's In the Box
Quick Start Guide
FM indoor antenna
Safety Instructions
AM loop antenna
Notes on radio
Warranty (for North America model only) Cable labels
Receiver
Power cord
Sound calibration microphone
Sound calibration microphone stand
Remote control unit (RC-1240)
R6P/AA batteries
External antennas for Bluetooth / wireless connectivity
· The included sound calibration microphone stand is convenient for use when performing Speaker Calibration. Using your own tripod or the supplied Sound calibration microphone stand enables settings to be automatically configured to the optimum listening environment, providing exceptionally high performance.
2
Important: External Antennas
The removable external antennas are required for both Bluetooth and Wireless network connectivity. Please make sure to connect the antennas before attempting to use the Bluetooth or Wi-Fi features of the AVR-X4700H.
n Connecting the external antennas for
Bluetooth / Wireless connectivity
For each of the two antennas: q Place the antenna evenly over the antenna terminal
located at the upper left or right corner of the rear panel. w Turn the antenna clockwise until it is fully connected. Do
not over tighten. e Rotate the antenna upwards for the best possible
reception.
q
w
e
3
Setup
There are four steps to the setup process.
1 Installing batteries in the remote control unit
1 Installing batteries in the
remote control unit
2 Connecting the receiver
3 Following the On-Screen Setup Assistant 4 Downloading the Mobile Apps
Batteries
4
2 Connecting the receiver
1) Place the receiver near your TV and connect the power cord
TV
Power cord (supplied)
Receiver
Connect to household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
5
2) Connect the receiver to your home network
Wired LAN
Connect an Ethernet cable (not included) between your receiver and your network router.
Wireless LAN
When connecting to wireless LAN (Wi-Fi), follow the instructions in "Connecting the external antennas for Bluetooth / Wireless connectivity" and connect the antennas.
To LAN port
Router
6
3) Connect the receiver to your TV with 4) Turn on the TV an HDMI cable
HDMI IN (ARC/eARC)
HDMI cable
HDMI OUT MONITOR 1 (ARC/eARC)
TV remote control unit
5) Select the appropriate HDMI input on your TV
Receiver (Rear panel)
ARC (Audio Return Channel) and eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) support: If your TV supports ARC, your TV can send audio back to the AV receiver when you are using your TV's built-in video sources (TV tuner, Smart TV streaming services, etc.) ARC requires that you enable HDMI CEC on your TV. Please refer to your TV's Owner's Manual for instructions on how to setup HDMI CEC. In addition, if your TV supports eARC, it can also send back high bitrate audio formats such as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS:X. Please refer to your TV's Owner's Manual for additional information about enabling the eARC function.
7
HDMI
INPUT
or
TV/ VIDEO
TV remote control unit
6) Turn on the receiver
· Press X to turn on the receiver.
7) Verify the connection
· Verify that you can see this screen on your TV.
AV Receiver Setup Assistant Please select a language... English Français Español
If this screen is not displayed, please go back and retry the steps again in the recommended sequence.
8
3 Following the On-Screen Setup Assistant
Now TV is connected to the receiver. The Setup Assistant will walk you through connecting and configuring your speakers and components to your Denon receiver. Please use the remote control and follow the on-screen instructions.
AV Receiver Setup Assistant
Please select a language...
English Français Español
9
4 Downloading the Mobile Apps
Download both the "HEOS" App and the "Denon 2016 AVR Remote" App for the full home entertainment experience. The HEOS App is required to access online music through your AVR.
HEOS
The HEOS App allows you to explore, browse, and play music from many online streaming services or from your own music library.
Denon 2016 AVR Remote
Control your new AVR with the latest Denon 2016 AVR Remote App. Volume control, sound mode selection and advanced settings are always only a tap away.
10
Owner's Manual
· For more information, visit www.denon.com · Refer to the Online Manual for other functions
information and operation procedure details. manuals.denon.com/AVRX4700H/NA/EN/
Online Manual
11
www.denon.com
Printed in Vietnam 5411 11826 00AD © 2020 Sound United. All Rights Reserved.
7.2 SURROUND SPEAKERS
L SURROUND L SURROUND BACK
L SURROUND BACK
I
SUBWOOFER2 i SUBWOOFER2
I
R SURROUND BACK
I
! R SURROUND BACK
I
I
L FRONT HEIGHT L ZONE2
L FRONT HEIGHT L ZONE2
(
Speaker Side
D?
D
~
Receiver Side
:aZJI"~ l2CJ~I
0
l9CJOJ
L...J
L...J
I
R FRONT HEIGHT
!
R FRONT HEIGHT
I
R ZONE2
l I
R ZONE2
I
i
L ZONE2
I I I I
!
L ZONE2
D?
fl
liT" l2CJ~I
I
R ZONE2
:
R ZONE2
I
I
·;
L ZONE3
I I I I
I
e L ZONE3 \' '-----------------------------------------------------------~
R ZONE3
I
!
I
R ZONE3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- OPTIONAL ___________________________________________________________ ______________ J
r------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ~
L TOP FRONT
L TOP FRONT
TOP SURROUND iI TOP SURROUND I
R TOP FRONT
i I
R TOP FRONT
I
TOP MIDDLE L
TOP MIDDLE L
TOPREARL
TOPREARL
L SURIIOIN} HEIGHT
L SURROUND IIIGHT
L
L REAR HEIGHT
L REAR HEIGHT
L FRONT DOLBY
L FRONT DOLBY
L SURAOIII) DOLBY
'
L SURR0Ufl) DOLBY
I,-
--------- -------------------,\
Speaker Side
Receiver Side
ztZJf, I£CJ~I
0
. l9CJ OI
'
=
=
f)
[l J~
c-
'-..
i9
=
CJ
OI
=
er-
I~,---------------------- ------------- ---------------- ---- ----~'
I
R i R TOP MIDDLE
TOP MIDDLE
I
I
R TOP REAR
i
R TOP REAR
I
I
R i R SURROUND HEIGHT
SURROUND HEIGHT
I
I
R i R REAR HEIGHT
REAR HEIGHT
I
I
R i R FRONT DOLBY
FRONT DOLBY
I
R i R SURROUND DOLBY
I
SURROUND DOLBY
I
L BACKDOLBY
L BACK DOLBY
I
R i BACK DOLBY I
R BACK DOLBY
------------------------------------------------------------------------- OPTIONAL -------------------------------------- ------ ------ -----------------------·
I
CBL/SAT i CBL/SAT I
I
Blu-ray ! Blu-ray
I
MONITOR
MONITOR
I
DVD
i
DVD
I
I
GAME
i
GAME
I
I
MEDIA PLAYER i MEDIA PLAYER I
I
BK
i
BK
I
I
I
CD
i
CD
I
·----------------------------------------------------- ------------- ---------- HDMI ·-------------------------------------------------- --- ----- ------------------
Microphone Stand Assembly Instructions
Montageanleitung Mikrofonstander Instructions d'assemblage du support de microphone lstruzioni per ii montaggio del supporto microfono lnstrucciones de montaje del soporte del micr6fono
Montage-instructies Microfoonstatief Monteringsanvisning for mikrofonstall '1HCTPYK4~~ no c6opKe CTO~K~ no11 M~Kpo<j>OH lnstrukcje montatu stojaka na mikrofon
x 1'? :,_ 9::, FfflJt.rcrmBJl·
Jfl'l/xt:5!1:~lli~tJl.a)l
1
2
3
4
DENON®
Congratulations on purchasing this Denon product! We invite you to join the Denon Owner's Club.
Thank you for choosing Denon. Be the first to know about upcoming Denon products and get exclusive previews of new technologies. You will also receive members only offers from our online store and be the first in line for all promotions and contests.
h t t p://usa.denon .c o m / o w n e r s c l u b Join today!
Please register your product at,
USA Customers : http://usa.denon.com/register Canada Customers : http://ca.denon.com/register
Denon Factory Service Information
USA
DENON FACTORY SERVICE by PANURGY OEM
701 Ford Road (South Dock) Rockaway, NJ 07866-2053 (973) 625-4056 (973) 625-9489 Fax
h ! t p :/ / w w w . p a n u r g y o e m . c o m / D e n o n / D e n o n r e p a i r . h t m l To locate an authorized warranty service center within your area please visit our web site at
http://usa.denon.com/servicecenters
CANADA
DENON FACTORY SERVICE by MICROLANDTECHNICAL SERVICES
170 Alden Road, Unit 2 Markham, ON L3R4C1
(905) 940-1982 http://clientportal.microland .ca/rmastart.aspx To locate an authorized warranty service center within your area please visit our web site at
http://ca.denon.com/servicecenters
WARRANTY DE COMMON 5431 10003 90AD
VQE1A1024Z
1
i This w=,<y will be hooo,ed ooly lo <he U.S.A. DENO N® i r--··1llll,...-,,111,.....,1lll··...··1Hh·...··1llh·...·111ih·. .-·1lll··. .··llll··...··1lll··...-·tlll1, .... ,1lll··....··1lll··...··1lll··...··1lll··...··1lll··....··1lll··4'>··1lll··...··1lll··....,1lll·-....,1Ul··....,1llh·....,1tll··....,1lll··....,1lll··...··1Ul· ·...··1llh·...··1llh·...··1lll··...··1lll··...··1llh·...··1llh·...··tlllt
tt Length ofNon-TransferableWarranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
~--', This warranty on your DENON product which is distributed and warranted by DENON ELECTRONICS (USA), LLC remains in effect for the following periods from
' t
the date of the original consumer purchase from an AUTHORIZED DENON ELECTRON1CS (USA), LLC DEALER.
t
Product Category
t
AN Controller, AN Receiver, AM/FM Receiver
IN-Command seriesTM AV Receivers, Sound bar
AVC. AVR, ORA
2
AVR-***'CI, AVR-X****, DHT-S****
3
DVD Receiver, DVD Home Theater System
ADV, S
1
t
0/A Converter, Portable USB-DAC / Headphone Amplifier Pre-Amplifier, Digital Pre-Amplifier, Power-Amplifier, Head Amplifier
DA PRA, AVP, OAP. POA. HA
2 3
t
Tuner, Integrated Amplifier Option Board
TU, PMA ACD
3 3
Super Audio CD/ CD Player, DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player
DCD, DCM, DVD, DVM, DBP, DBT
1
' t ' ' t
CD Recorder CD Receiver, Network CD Receiver, Network Receiver
CDRW RCD, DRA-N
1 1
t
Network Audio Player
DNP
t t
System Audio. CD Receiver System
Turntable
I 1 I Autolift / Manual I 2 I Full Automatic
Speaker
D-F, D-M, S, D-T DP-L, DP-M DP-F, DP-USB SC
Sub-woofer
DSW
Microphone
DM-S, OM-A
Bluetooth Speaker
DSB
iPhone® / iPod® Docks
ASD,DSD
Headphone
AH
Front Surround Home Theater System
DHT-FS
TV Speaker Base
t
Video Processor Cartridge
DHT-T**** DVP DL
2 1 YEAR(SI 4
'
2
5 1
t
2 1 1 1 1
' t
1 3
t
90
t
Remote Controller Cables
Speaker stands
RC AK
90 90
DAYS
ASF
90
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries
'
t t What is Covered
Except as specified below, this Warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product occurring during the above warranty periods. The following are
t not covered by the Warranty: (1) Any product which is not distributed in the U.S.A. by DENON ELECTRON1CS (USA), LLC. (2) Any product which is not purchased in the U.S.A. from an authorized DENON dealer. (Note: AUTHORIZED DENON DEALERS can be identified by DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER sticker displayed in
i the stores. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer is a DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER, please contact DENON as listed below). (3) Any product on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. (4) Damaged deterioration or malfunction resulting from: a) Accident, act of nature, abuse, misuse, neglect, unauthorized product repair, opening of or modification or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product. b) Repair or attempted repair by anyone not authorized by DENON. c) Any shipment of the product (claim must be presented to carrier). (5) Items subject to wear from normal usage (tape heads, cartridges, stylus, battery, etc.). (6) Periodic check-ups which do not disclose any defect. (7) Use of the product outside the U.S.A. (8) Damaged magnetic tape or CD/DVD/BO discs. (9) Use in industrial,
i
f
' ' t
commercial, and/or professional applications. (10) Any installation or removal charges resulting from product failure,
t What We Will Pay For If during the applicable warranty period from the date of original consumer purchase your DENON product is found to be defective by DENON, DENON will
t repair, or at its option, replace with new, reconditioned or equivalent model, such defective product without charge for parts or labor.
' '
t How to Obtain Warranty Performance If your unit ever needs service, it may be taken or shipped to any authorized DENON service station or DENON ELECTRON1CS (if you are uncertain as to whether
t a service station is DENON authorized, please visit our website at http://usa.denon.com/servicecenters or contact DENON as listed below.) In all other cases, the following procedures apply whenever your unit must be transported for warranty service;
t
a. You are responsible for transporting your unit or arranging for its transportation. b. If shipment of your unit is required;
t
You must pay the initial shipping charges, but we will pay the return shipping charges if the repairs are covered by the Warranty. c. WHEN RETURN1NG YOUR UN1T FOR WARRANTY SERVICE A COPY OF THE ORIGINAL SALES SLIP MUST BE ATTACHED.
t
d. You should include the following: your name, address, daytime telephone number, model and serial number of the product and a description of the problem. In the case of a CD/DVD/BO Player, please enclose ONE (1) disc that the unit has failed with for tt;st reasons. It will be returned with the unit.
t THIS WARRANTY IS VALID IN THE U.S .A. ONLY.
If your product does not require service, but you have questions regarding its operation, please contact our Customer Support Department as listed below,
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
t t
f
' ' f
t ' OUR LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT OUR OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT AND SHALL IN NO EVENT INCLUDE INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR PROPERTY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR
PRODUCTS LOST, STOLEN AND/OR DAMAGED DURING SHIPPING.
:_~_,_ SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND/OR DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
i INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, but you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This Warranty may not be altered other than in a
t t
4
t writing signed by an officer of Denon Electronics USA, LLC.
t
DENON ELECTRONICS (USA), LLC (a D&M Holdings Company)
t
100 Co rporate Drive
'? DENON FACTORY SERVICE by PANURGY OEM 701 Ford Road (South Dock)
Rockaway, NJ 07866-2053
4
t t
Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 (201 ) 762-6665
www.usa .denon.com
(973) 625-4056
(973) 625-9489 Fax
http://www.panurgyoem.com/Denon/Denonrepair.html ·
,1
,,u,,. .... . - .,,111·-..-.-11111,.. . ..,1Uh-....,1t1·1-. . .,,,1111,.,.,11Uh,.,.,11111,.....,1111i-. . .,,11ll··...··1lll··. .··1llh-. ..,,111t.. ..,1111,.. ..,1111,.. ..,111···. .··1lll··. .···ll···. .··1Hl··. .···lll··. .··1lll··....,1111·-. .·,11l1··. .··1Ul··...··1lll··. . .·111l···...·11llh-......111,.. ..,1111o.. ..,,111,.. ..,1111··~
2
~-,1tll··~·,1lll··. . .··1lll··. . .··llll:·. . .··1lll··. . .··tlll··. . .·11lll··. . .··1'.l''·....··1llh·....··1llh,. . ..,,lll1·. . .. ,1lll··....-·1tll··. . .·11ll1t·.....,1lll··. . ..,,llh·. . ..,,lll1·. . .··1Hl··. . .··1llh·. . .·111ll1·. . .··1llh·. . .-·1llh·. . .-111lh·. . .-·llll··. . .··llll··. . ..,,lll··. . ..,11tl··. . ..,,lll·~-,1Ul··. . ..,,llh·. . ..,1lll··. . ..,,III.
I 00 Cm@. DENO N® I Thls w=~'Y w.ll hooillOOooly m
tt Length of Non-Transferable Warranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
t
~-·
!_ This warranty on your DENON product which is distributed and warranted by D&M CANADA INC. remains in effect for the following periods from the date of the
t ~ original consumer purchase from an AUTHORIZED D&M CANADA INC. DEALER.
?
!
t
AN Controller, AN Receiver, AM/FM Receiver IN·Command series TM AV Receivers, Sound bar
AVC, AVR, ORA
2
AVR-****CI, AVR·X····, DHT·S····
3
DVD Receiver, DVD Home Theater System
ADV. S
1
?
t
0/A Converter, Portable USB-DAC / Headphone Amplifier Pre-Amplifier, Digital Pre-Amplifier, Power-Amplifier, Head Amplifier
DA PRA. AVP, OAP. POA, HA
2 3
'
Tuner. Integrated Amplifier Option Board
TU. PMA ACD
3 3
t
Super Audio CD / CD Player. DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player
DCD, DCM, DVD. OVM. OBP, DBT
1
CD Recorder
CDRW
1
i
CD Receiver, Network CD Receiver, Network Receiver Network Audio Player
RCD, DRA-N DNP
1 2
t
System Audio, CD Receiver System
Turntable
I 1 I Autolift / Manual I 2 I Full Automatic
Speaker
Sub-woofer
Microphone
Bluetooth Speaker
iPhone® / iPod® Docks
Headphone
Front Surround Home Theater System
TV Speaker Base
Video Processor
Cartridge
Remote Controller
Cables
Speaker stands
0-F. 0-M. S, 0-T DP-L. OP-M DP·F, DP·USB SC DSW DM-S. OM-A DSB ASD,DSD AH DHT·FS DHT-T**** DVP DL RC AK ASF
1 YEAR(S) 4
f
2 5 1 2
' t
1 1 1
I
1 1 3 90
!
t
90 90
DAYS
90
' i
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
What is Covered
?
Except as specified below, this Warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship in this product occurring during the above warranty periods. The following are not covered by the Warranty: (1) Any product which is not distributed in Canada by D&M CANADA INC. (2) Any product which is not purchased in Canada from an authorized DENON dealer. (Note: AUTHORIZED DENON DEALERS can be identified by DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER sticker displayed in the stores. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer is a DENON AUTHORIZED DEALER, please contact D&M CANADA INC. as listed below). (3) Any product on
?
' i
which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. (4) Damaged deterioration or malfunction resulting from: a) Accident, act of nature, abuse, misuse,
t neglect, unauthorized product repair, opening of or modification or failure to follow instructions supplied with the product. b) Repair or attempted repair by anyone
not authorized by DENON. c) Any shipment of the product (claim must be presented to carrier). (5) Items subject to wear from normal usage (tape heads, cartridges,
stylus, battery, etc.). (6) Periodic check-ups which do not disclose any defect. (7) Use of the product outside Canada. (8) Damaged magnetic tape or CD/DVD/BD discs. (9) Use in industrial, commercial, and/or professional applications. (10) Any installation or removal charges resulting from product failure.
What We Will Pay For If during the applicable warranty period from the date of original consumer purchase your DENON product is found to be defective by DENON, DENON will
repair, or at its option, replace with new, reconditioned or equivalent model, such defective product without charge for parts or labor.
' ' t
How to Obtain Warranty Performance
i
t If your unit ever needs service, it may be taken or shipped to any authorized DENON service station or D&M CANADA INC. (For an authorized DENON service
station near you, please check our website http://ca.denon.com/servicecenters or contact D&M CANADA INC. as listed below.) In all other cases, the following
procedures apply whenever your unit must be transported for warranty service;
a. You are responsible for transporting your unit or arranging for its transportation. b. If shipment of your unit is required;
You must pay the initial shipping charges, but we will pay the return shipping charges if the repairs are covered by the Warranty.
! ·
c. WHEN RETURNING YOUR UNIT FOR WARRANTY SERVICE A COPY OF THE ORIGINAL SALES SLIP MUST BE ATTACHED. d. You should include the following: your name, address, daytime telephone number, model and serial number of the product and a description of the problem.
?
In the case of a CD/DVD/BD Player, please enclose ONE (1) disc that the unit has failed with for test reasons. It will be returned with the unit.
?
THIS WARRANTY IS VALID IN CANADA ONLY.
t
If your product does not require service, but you have questions regarding its operation, please contact our Customer Support Department as listed below.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
; '
t OUR LIABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT OUR OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT AND SHALL IN NO EVENT
INCLUDE INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL COMMERCIAL OR PROPERTY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR
PRODUCTS LOST, STOLEN AND/OR DAMAGED DURING SHIPPING.
t SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND/OR DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
t INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
t This warranty gives you specific legal rights, but you may also have other rights which vary from province to province. This Warranty may not be altered other than
! t
_.
in a writing signed by an officer of D&M Canada Inc.
t t ~
.l .
D&M CANADA INC.
0, 10462 Islington Avenue, Unit 8B Kleinbur Ontario L0J 1CO ww(9w.5ca) .4d7e5n-4o0n8.c5om
·
DENON FACTORY SERVICE by MICROLANDTECHNICAL SERVICES
i t
170 Alden Road, Unit 2 Markham, ON L3R 4C1
t ,
(905) 940-1982 http://clientportal.microland.ca/rmastart.aspx
t -
·,1111,.. . ..,1llh-. . .,,,11i,.. . ..,111'··. . .··1ll···. . .··11ll··. . .··tlll··. . .··1lll··. . .··1lll··. . .··1ll1··. . .··1llt··. . .··1tl1··. . .··1ll1·- . . .··1lll··. . .··ltll··. . .··Ulh·. . .··llll··. .··tlll··. .··llll··....,1lll··. . ..,1llh·. . ..,1lll··. . .,11i···.....,t1ll··.....,1llh·. . ..,,Ul··. .··1lll·-~ ··lllh·~··llll'·.....11llh,.....,1lll··. . ..,,111,.. . .
3
Notes on radio
USA CANADA
FCC Information (For US customers)
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION · Product Name: Integrated Network AV Receiver/ Integrated Network AV
Amplifier · Model Number: AVR-S960H / AVR-X2700H / AVR-X3700H / AVC-X3700H /
AVR-X4700H / AVC-X4700H / AVR-X6700H / AVC-X6700H · CONTAINS TRANSMITTER MODULE FCC ID: RAX-AIOS4-0S This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and 12) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC (a D & M Holdings Company) 100 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 Tel. 1201) 762-6665
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product. when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by Denon may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
3. IMPORTANT (For Network) When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which Is available at retailer. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
4. CAUTION (For Bluetooth/Wi-Fi) · To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement. separation distance of at least 20 cm
must be maintained between this product and all persons. · This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter. · 5.15-5.25 GHz band is restricted to indoor operations only.
5. NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: · Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. · Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. · Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected. · Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/ TV
technician for help.
INFORMATION FCC (Pour la clientele etasunienne)
1. INFORMATIONS DE CONFORMITE · Norn du produit : Ampli-Tuner Audio/Video Reseau / Ampli Audio/Video Reseau · Numero de modele : AVR-S960H / AVR-X2700H / AVR-X3700H /
AVC-X3700H / AVR-X4700H / AVC-X4700H / AVR-X6700H / AVC-X6700H · CONTIENT MODULE EMETTEUR FCC ID : RAX-AIOS4-0S Ce produ1t est conforme a la section 15 du reglement FCC. L'utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suIvantes: (1) ce produit ne provoque pas d'1nterferences nocives et 12) ce produit doit accepter toute interference, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainer un fonctionnement non souhaitable.
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC la D & M Holdings Company) 100 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041 Tel. 1201) 762-6665
2. REMARQUE IMPORTANTE: NE PAS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT Ce produit. lorsqu'il est installe comme indique dans les instructions de ce manuel, est conforme aux normes FCC. Les modifications qui ne sont pas expressement approuvees par Denon peuvent annular l'autorisation FCC a utiliser le produit.
3. IMPORTANT (Pour reseau )
a a Lars du branchement de ce produit un routeur ou un concentrateur r8seau, n'utilisez qu'un
cable STP ou ScTP LAN blinds (disponible chez un detaillant). Suivre toutes instructions d'installation. Dans le cas contraire, cela pourrait annuler l'autorlsation
a FCC utiliser cet appareil.
4. PRECAUTION (Pour Bluetooth/Wi-Fi) · Afin de repondre aux exigences de conformite FCC sur !'exposition aux RF, une distance d'au
moins 20 cm doit ~tre maintenue entre cet appareil et toutes les personnes. · Cet appareil ainsi que son antenna ne doivent pas se trouver #J proxim1t8 immediate, rn ~tre
utilises en association avec une autre antenne ou un autre 8metteur.
a · La bande 5, 15-5,25 GHz est hm1tee uniquement une utilisation en interieur.
5. NOTE Ce produit a ete teste et ii est conforme aux limitations des dispositifs numeriques de Class B, en vertu de la section 15 du reglement FCC. Ces limitations sont con,;ues pour fournir une protection raisonnable centre les interferences nocives sur une installation residentielle. Ce produit genere, utilise et emet de l'energie de radiofrequence et s'il n'est pas installe et utilise conformement aux instructions, ii peut entrainer des interferences nefastes avec les communications radio. Toutefois, nous ne pouvons pas garantir !'absence d'interf8rence avec certaines installations. En cas d'interferences nefastes sur la reception de la radio ou de la television provoquees par cet appareil, survenant au moment de !'activation ON ou de la
a desactivation OFF, nous conseillons l'utilisateur d'essayer de corriger !'interference comme suit:
· Reorienter ou deplacer l'antenne. · Augmenter la distance entre l'equipement et le recepteur. · Connecter l'appareil a la prise murale d'un circuit different de celui du recepteur. · Consulter un revendeur local agree pour la distribution de ce type de produit ou un technician
radio /TV experimente.
IC Information (For Canadian customers)
1. PRODUCT CONTAINS TRANSMITTER MODULE IC: 4711A-AIOS40S This product complies with RSS rules of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 11 I this product may not cause harmful interference, and 121 this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES--003.
2. CAUTION To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. Iii the device for operation in the band 5,150 - 5,250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the
potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. (ii) high-power radars are allocated as primary users Ii e. priority users) of the bands 5,250 - 5,350
MHz and 5,650 - 5,850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
Informations sur IC (pour les clients canadiens)
1. APPAREIL CONTIENT MODULE EMETTEUR IC : 4711A-AIOS40S Cet appareil est conforme a la norme regles CNR du Canada. L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autonsee seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) ii ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 12) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit etre prM a accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique re,;u, meme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du disposit1f. Cet appareil numerique de la classe Best conforme a la norme NMB--003 du Canada.
2. ATTENTION Afin de reduire le nsque d'mterference aux autres utilisateurs, ii taut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de fa,;on ace que la puIssance Isotrope rayonnee equivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas superieure au niveau requis pour l'obtention d'une communication satisfaisante. Ii) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz sont reserves uniquement pour
une utilisation a l'inteneur afin de reduire les nsques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux. (ii) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi atre avis8s que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puIssance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.+<J., qu'ils ont la prioritel pour les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
For Canadian customers/ Pour les clients canadiens: CAN ICES-3 (Bl / NMB-3 (Bl "for indoor use only"
0 RF Exposure Information
This equipment complies with FCC/ IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that are deemed to comply without testing of specific absorption ratio (SAR).
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
Cet equipement est conforme aux normes d'exposition aux radiations FCC / IC definies pour un
a environnement non contr0le et satisfait les directives d'exposition la radiofrequence (RF) dans
le supplement C des OET65 et RSS-102 des regles d'exposition a la frequence radio (RF) IC. Cet equipement a de tres faibles niveaux d'energie RF qui sont juges conformes sans test de taux d'absorption specifique (SAR).
Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec une distance minimale de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps.
DENON
CE
[ENGLISH] 1. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Hereby, ID&M Holdings Inc.I declares that our product is in compliance with following EU/EC Directives. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets RE directive requirements. Modification of the product could result in hazardous Radio and EMC radiation. 3. CAUTION Separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between this product and all persons. This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
[DEUTSCH] 1. OBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLARUNG
Hiermit erklart [D&M Holdings Inc.I, dass unser Produkt der, dass die folgenden EU/ EC-Richtlinien entspricht. Der vollstandige Text der EU-Konformitatserklarung ist unter der folgenden lnternetadresse verfugbar: 2. WICHTIGER HINWEIS: NEHMEN SIE KEINE VERANDERUNGEN AN DIESEM PRODUKTVOR Wann dieses Produkt entsprechend dieser Bed1enungsanleitung aufgebaut wird, entspricht es den Anforderungen der RE-Richtlinie. Veranderungen am Produkt konnen zu gefahrlicher Funkund EMV-Strahlung fuhren. 3. VORSICHT Zwischen dieses Produkts und Personen muss ein Schutzabstand von 20 cm eingehalten werden. Dieses Produkt und seine Antenna durfen nicht neben anderen Antennen oder Sendern aufgestellt oder zusammen mit ihnen verwendet werden.
[FRAN<;AIS] 1. DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE
Le soussigne, ID&M Holdings Inc.I. declare que noire produit est conforme ~ la directive UE/ CE. Le texte complet de la declaration UE de conformite est disponible ~ l'adresse internet suivante: 2. MISE EN GARDE IMPORTANTE : NE JAMAIS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT Si toutes les consignes 1ndiquees dans ce mode ont eta respectees pendant son installation, ce produit est conforme aux directives RE. Toute modification du produit risquerait alors de generer des rad1at1ons radio et EMC dangereuses. 3. ATTENTION
L'appareil devra Atre situee a une distance de 20 cm au moins des personnes. Ce produit ainsi
que son antenna ne devront en aucun cas etre utilises a proximit8 d'une autre antenna ou transmetteur.
[ITALIANO] 1. DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA
II fabbricante, [D&M Holdings Inc.I, dichiara che ii nostro prodotto /J conforme alla direttiva UE/
e CE. II testo completo della dichiarazione di conforml!~ UE d1spon1b1le al seguente indirizzo
Internet: 2. AWERTENZA IMPORTANTE: NON MODIFICARE QUESTO PRODOTTO
Se installato come indicato nelle istruzioni del presente manuale, questo prodotto soddisfa i requisiti della direttiva RE. Eventuali modifiche apportate al prodotto potrebbero causare pericolose radiaz,on, radioed EMC. 3. ATTENZIONE
t necessario mantenere una distanza minima di 20 cm tra questo prodotto e le persone.
Ouesto prodotto e la relativa antenna non devono essere posizionati in prossimit8 di altre antenne o trasmettitori e non devono essere utilizzati congiuntamente a questi ultimi.
[ESPANOL] 1. DECLARACION DE CONFORMIDAD
Por la presente, [D&M Holdings Inc.I. declara que nuestro producto es conforme con la Directivas UE/CE. El texto completo de la declaraci6n UE de conformidad esta disponible en la direccl6n Internet siguiente: 2. NOTA IMPORTANTE: NO MODIFIQUE ESTE PRODUCTO Este producto, si es instalado de acuerdo con las instrucciones contenidas en este manual, cumple los requisitos de la directiva RE. La modificaci6n del producto puede producir radiaci6n de Radio y EMC peligrosa. 3. PRECAUCION Se debe mantener una separaci6n de al menos 20 cm del producto y las personas. Este producto y su antena no debe instalarse ni utilizarse conjuntamente con otra antena o transmisor.
[NEDERLANDS] 1. EENVORMIGHEIDSVERKLARING
Hierbij verklaar ik, [D&M Holdings Inc.I, dat ons product conform is met R1chtlijn EU/EG. De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan warden geraadpleegd op het volgende internetadres: 2. BELANGRIJKE MEDEDELING: BRENG AAN DIT PRODUCT GEEN AANPASSINGEN AAN Dit product. indien ge'installeerd volgens de aanwijzingen in daze gebru1ksaanwijzing, voldoet aan de vereisten van de RE-richtlijn. Aanpassing van di! product kan gevaarlijke radio- en EMCstrahng tot gevolg hebben. 3. LET OP Houd tussen en personen altijd een afstand van tenminste 20 cm aan. Dit product en zijn antenna mogen niet in de buurt van een andere antenna of zender warden geplaatst of In combinatie daarmee warden gebruikt.
Radio Specification (for Europe model)
Tvoe
Frequency Ranqe
Bluetooth
2,402 - 2,480 MHz
WLAN (2 .4 GHz)
2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz
5,150 - 5,250 MHz
5 GHz Radio
5,250 - 5,350 MHz
5,470- 5,725 MHz
* Note: The above specifications is based on the RE Directive.
There is a possibility to varies by countries.
Max. RF Power 20dBm 20dBm 23 dBm 23dBm 30dBm
[SVENSKA] 1. OVERENSSTAMMELSESINTYG
Harmed forsakrar [D&M Holdings Inc.I, att v~r produkt overensstammer med direlctiv EU/EC. Den fullstand1ga texten till EU-forsakran om overensstammelse finns pA foljande webbadress: 2. VIKTIGT: APPARATEN FAR INTE MODIFIERAS Under forutsattning att apparaten installeras enligt anvisningarna i denna bruksanvisning, uppfyller denna kraven i RE-direktivet. Ev. modif1ering av apparaten kan resultera i farlig radiooch elektromagnetisk strAlning. 3. FORSIKTIGT Se till att det !inns ett avstAnd pA minst 20 cm mellan apparatens och personer i omgivningen. Apparaten och dess antenn !Ar inte placeras eller anvandas i narheten av andra antenner eller sandare.
[PYCCKIIIM] 1. CEPTIIICl>IIIKAT COOTBETCTBIIIA
HacTOAL.l1SM, ID&M Holdings Inc.I, 3aAenAeT, sTo Haw npoAYKT ccooTeeTCTeyeT ,QapeKTaee EU/ EC. no11HbU::, T0KCT AeK11apa4111111 COOTB0TCTBIIIA EC MO:>KHO nOllyYIIITb no C11eAYK>l.148MY IIIHT8PH8TaAPecy: 2. BA>KHOI HE 1113MEHRMTE AAHHblM nPOAYKT npoAYKT, YCT8HOB118HHbllii COfJ18CHO IIIHCTpyKU.IIIAM B H8CTOAl.148M pyKOBOACTB8, OTB8'-i88T Tpe6oBaHIIIAM AIIIP8KTIIIBbl RE. l-'13M8H8H\118 npOAYKT8 MO)K8T np111eecr111 K nOAB118HIIIIO onaCHOro 3118KTpDM8rHIIITHOrO 111311yY8HIIIA, 3. nPEAYnPE>KAEHIIIE He np1116Jllll)K8HTeCb KA8HHOro 1113A811111A 611111)K8, '-i8M H8 20 CM. 3anpe1.14aercA 111cnOJ1b3088Tb A8HHbllii npoAYKT \It 8HTeHHY C,o.pyrolii 8HT8HHOlii 11111111 nep8A8T'-illlKOM.
[POLSKI] 1. DEKLARACJA ZGODNOSCI
ID&M Holdings Inc.I, niniejszym oswiadcza, ie nasz produlct jest zgodny z dyrektywq UE/WE. Pefny tekst deklaracji zgodnosci UE jest dost~pny pod nast~pujqcym adresem internetowym: 2. UWAGA: MODYFIKACJA TEGO URZJ\DZENIA JEST ZABRONIONA Po zainstalowaniu zgodnie z instrukcjami zawartymi w niniejszej instrukqi obsfugi urzqdzenie to b~dzie spelniac wymogi dyrektywy RE. Wprowadzanie modyfikacji do tego urzqdzenia moie skutkowaC powstaniem niebezpiecznego promieniowania elektromagnetycznego oraz radiowego. 3. OSTRZEiENIE Mi~dzy tego produktu i wszelkimi osobami musi bye zachowana odlegfosc przynajmnieI 20 cm. Urzqdzenia wraz z antenq nie moina instalowac w polqczeniu z innq antenq lub nadajnikiem.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION · Product Name: Integrated Network AV Receiver / Integrated Network AV
Amplifier · Model Number: AVR-S960H / AVR-X2700H / AVR-X3700H / AVC-X3700H /
AVR-X4700H / AVC-X4700H / AVR-X6700H / AVC-X6700H
<EU/EC Directives.> RE: 2014/53/EU
<EU declaration of conformity URL: http://manuals.denon.com/CEdeclarationi>
D&M Holdings Inc. 2-1 Nissin-cha, Kawasaki-ku, Kawasaki, Kanagawa, 210-8569 Japan EU importer: D&M Europe B.V. Beemdstraat 11, 5653 MA Eindhoven, The Netherlands
[ENGLISH] 5,150 - 5,350 MHz is restricted to indoor use only
[DEUTSCH] 5.150 - 5.350 MHz darf nur In geschlossenen Raumen verwendet werden
[FRAN<;AIS] 5 150 - 5 350 MHz est limite ~ une utilisation en interieur uniquement
[ITALIANO] La frequenza 5.150 - 5.350 MHz /J limitata al solo uso interno
[ESPANOL] 5.150 - 5.350 MHz esta restringido al uso en interiores solamente
[NEDERLANDS] 5.150 - 5.350 MHz Is beperkt tot alleen binnenshuis gebruik
[SVENSKA] 5 150 - 5 350 MHz ar begransat till inomhusbruk
[PYCCKIIIM] 5150 - 5350 Mr u. orpaHlll'-illlB88TCA \11Cnonb30B8Hlll8M TOllbKO B nOM61..L.l8HIIIIII
[POLSKI] 5 150 - 5 350 MHz to cz~stotliwosc ograniczona do uiytkowania jedynie w pomieszczeniach
Ill
UK
DE
FR
IT
ES
NL
SE
PL
D&M Holdings Inc. 5431 10688 OOAD
DENON WITH HEOS BUILT-IN. ANY SONG. ANY ROOM. INDOORS OR OUT.
WHAT IS HEOS?
HEOS is a smart, wireless music streaming technology built into your Denon product. It uses your home network and the HEOS app to play your favorite music anywhere in your home.
* Make sure to connect your
Denon product to the network first
VOICE CONTROL
With your HEOS account, enjoy hands-free voice control that works seamlessly with leading voice assistants. Play a song, change volume, skip tracks, switch inputs and more.
* Learn more at www.heosaudio.com/voice
Requires device with Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant or Apple Siri built-in (sold separately).
~
0 ;1;~~TH
· · · works with the · Google Assistant
* Music and voice services availability varies by region. * L.'.accessibilite des services musicaux et vocaux varie selon la region.
QU'EST-CE QUE HEOS?
HEOS est une technologie d'ecoute de musique en continu intelligente
a et sans fil integree votre produit a Denon. Elle met profit votre reseau
residentiel et !'application HEOS pour diffuser votre musique preferee partout dans la maison.
* D'abord, assurez-vous de connecter votre
produit Denon au reseau.
COMMANDE VOCALE a Grace votre compte HEOS, profitez
de la commande vocale mains libres au fonctionnement harmonieux avec les meilleurs assistants vocaux. Faites jouer une chanson, ajustez le volume, sautez une piste, changez d'entree et plus encore.
* Pour en savoir plus, visitez
www.heosaudio.com/voice. Requiert un appareil integrant Alexa d'Amazon, !'Assistant Google ou Siri d'Apple (vendu separement).
~
~
9
- 1: ~ --- ~
-::·::--
,,111,, HEos·
BUILT-IN
cm;.;;;
~ A~~j; AirPlay
SUPPORT: +1 (855) 499-2820
w w w.denon .com
VQE1A1162Z
Fi
CERTIFIED
( )
( )
You'll need Spotify Premium to use Cor:nect, see details overleaf.
0 Add your new device to the same wifi network as your phone,
tablet or PC (see product user instructions for details).
e Open the Spotify app on your phone, tablet or PC, and play any song.
e If you're using the app or1 a phone - tap the song image in the bottom left of the screen. ·For tablet and PC move to step 4.
C, @) Tap the Connect ie:on C, Pick your devi~e.from the list. If you can't see it, just check it's
connected to the same wifi network as your phone, tablet or PC.
All done! Happy listening.
e @) Spotify· 1
Say hello to
Spotify Premium
Spotify Premium lets you listen to mi ll ions of songs ad-free - the artists you love, the latest hits and discoveries just fo r you. Simply hit pl ay to hear any song you like, at the highest sound quality. C heck o~t our curren t Premium offers at spotify.com/premium
Your new device has Spotify Connect built in.
Spotify Connect lets you co ntro l th e music playing on your dev[ce, using the Spotify app on your mobile, tablet or PC. Li stening is seamless. You can take cal ls, play ga mes, even -switch . your phone off - all without interrupt ing the music. Lea rn more at spotify.com/connect
Gspotify·
ca.denon.com/register
Denon | Premium AV Receivers, Wireless Speakers & Headphones
Spotify - ConnectSpotify Premium - Spotify (US)
technologies.com
usa.denon.com/register
Apache License, Version 2.0
I9BET
Denon | Premium AV Receivers, Wireless Speakers & Headphones
HEOS Built-in
Connect all your Home Speakers with Denon | Denon US
Panurgyoem
Spotify - Connect
Xiph.org